PROJECT MANUAL Novartis 200 Forum

Transcription

PROJECT
MANUAL
for construction of interior alterations
Novartis 200 Forum
Ground Floor
B405 ONE HEALTH PLAZA
EAST HANOVER, NJ
_____________________________________________
License No. ___________________________________
Prepared by
Gensler
10 North Park Place
Suite 400
Morristown, NJ 07960
973.290.8500
973.290.8585
Issue for Bid & Pricing
04.30.2014
Project Number 12.7468.005
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
Novartis 200 Forum Ground Floor
East Hanover, NJ
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP
DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
Date
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
Document No.
00 01 01
00 01 10
Title
Project Manual Signature Page
Table of Contents
FORMS INFORMATION
Date
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
Document No.
00 60 04
00 60 05
00 60 06
00 60 07
00 60 08
Title
Data Transfer Agreement Form
Request For Interpretation
Substitution Request Form
Bulletin Form
Change Order Form
PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS – NOT USED
CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS – NOT USED
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Date
Section No.
Title
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
01 10 00
01 25 00
01 26 00
01 26 13
01 29 00
01 31 00
01 32 00
01 33 00
01 40 00
01 50 00
01 60 00
01 73 00
01 73 29
01 74 19
01 77 00
01 78 39
01 81 19
Summary
Substitution Procedures
Contract Modification Procedures
Requests for Interpretation (RFI)
Payment Procedures
Project Management and Coordination
Construction Progress Documentation
Submittal Procedures
Quality Requirements
Temporary Facilities and Controls
Product Requirements
Execution
Cutting and Patching
Construction Waste Management and Disposal
Closeout Procedures
Project Record Documents
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Copyright 2013 Gensler
00 01 10 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
Date
Section No.
Title
04/30/2014
02 41 19
Selective Demolition
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
Date
Section No.
Title
04/30/2014
03 54 16
Hydraulic Cement Underlayment
DIVISION 04 – NOT USED
DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
Date
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
Section No.
06 10 00
06 40 23
Title
Rough Carpentry
Interior Architectural Woodwork
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Date
Section No.
Title
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
07 84 13
07 92 00
Penetration Firestopping
Joint Sealants
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS
Date
Section No.
Title
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
08 12 16
08 14 16
08 31 13
08 71 00
08 80 00
Interior Aluminum Frames
Flush Wood Doors
Access Doors and Frames
Door Hardware
Glazing
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
Date
Section No.
Title
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
04/30/2014
09 22 16
09 29 00
09 30 00
09 51 13
09 65 13
09 65 19
09 68 13
09 72 00
Non-Structural Metal Framing
Gypsum Board
Tiling
Acoustical Panel Ceilings
Resilient Base and Accessories
Resilient Tile Flooring
Tile Carpeting
Wall Coverings
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
Date
Section No.
Title
04/30/2014
10 44 00
Fire-Protection Specialties
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
Date
Section No.
Title
04/30/2014
11 31 00
Pantry Appliances
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - 2
Gensler
12.7468.005
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
DIVISIONS 15 through 19 – RESERVED
FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP – Indexed Separately
PROCESS EQUIPMENT SUBGROUP – Not Used
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - 3
Gensler
a~í~=qê~åëÑÉê=^ÖêÉÉãÉåí=
Entity Requesting Data
(“Transferee”)
Transferee Contact
Name
Project
Project Number
Client
Date
File
This is page
1C
1 of 1
qê~åëÑÉêÉÉ=Ü~ë=~ëâÉÇ=dÉåëäÉê=íç=éêçîáÇÉ=ÉäÉÅíêçåáÅ=ÅçéáÉë= çÑI=çê= ~ÅÅÉëë=íçI=ÅÉêí~áå=Çê~ïáåÖëI=ëéÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåëI= çê=çíÜÉê=ÇçÅìãÉåíëI=`^a=Ç~í~=ÑáäÉëI=
~åÇLçê= ÄìáäÇáåÖ= áåÑçêã~íáçå= ãçÇÉäë= EÅçääÉÅíáîÉäóI= 7a~í~ÒF= éêÉé~êÉÇ= Äó= dÉåëäÉê= ~åÇLçê= áíë= Åçåëìäí~åíë= EÅçääÉÅíáîÉäó= 7dÉåëäÉêÒF= Ñçê= íÜÉ= mêçàÉÅíK==
dÉåëäÉê=~ÖêÉÉë=íç=éêçîáÇÉ=qê~åëÑÉêÉÉ=ïáíÜ=íÜÉ=êÉèìÉëíÉÇ=a~í~I=ìåÇÉê=íÜÉ=íÉêãë=çÑ=íÜáë=a~í~=qê~åëÑÉê=^ÖêÉÉãÉåí=E7^ÖêÉÉãÉåíÒFK=
NK=
qÜÉ=íê~åëÑÉê=çÑ=íÜÉ=a~í~=áë=åçí=~åÇ=ëÜ~ää=åçí=ÄÉ=ÇÉÉãÉÇ=~=ë~äÉK==qÜÉ=a~í~=~êÉ=áåëíêìãÉåíë=çÑ=ëÉêîáÅÉK==dÉåëäÉê=ëÜ~ää=ÄÉ=ÇÉÉãÉÇ=íÜÉ=a~í~Ûë=
~ìíÜçê=~åÇ=ëÜ~ää=êÉí~áå=~ää=éêçéêáÉí~êó=êáÖÜíëI=áåÅäìÇáåÖ=~åó=ÅçéóêáÖÜíëI=ÉãÄçÇáÉÇ=íÜÉêÉáåK=
OK=
qê~åëÑÉêÉÉ= ã~ó= íê~åëÑÉê= íÜÉ= a~í~= íç= áíë= Åçåíê~ÅíçêëI= ëìÄÅçåíê~ÅíçêëI= ëìééäáÉêëI= ~åÇ= Åçåëìäí~åíë= EÅçääÉÅíáîÉäó= 7líÜÉêëÒFI= éêçîáÇÉÇ= qê~åëÑÉêÉÉ=
êÉèìáêÉë=íÜÉ=líÜÉêë=íç=ÄÉ=ÄçìåÇ=Äó=íÜáë=^ÖêÉÉãÉåí=~ë=áÑ=íÜÉó=ïÉêÉ=íÜÉ=qê~åëÑÉêÉÉ=áå=íÜáë=^ÖêÉÉãÉåíK==qê~åëÑÉêÉÉ=~åÇ=líÜÉêë=ã~ó=ìëÉ=íÜÉ=a~í~=
çåäó=Ñçê=éìêéçëÉë=êÉä~íÉÇ=íç=íÜÉ=mêçàÉÅíK=
PK=
qê~åëÑÉêÉÉ= ~ÅâåçïäÉÇÖÉë= íÜ~í= ~åçã~äáÉë= ~åÇ= Éêêçêë= ã~ó= çÅÅìê= ïÜÉå= íÜÉ= a~í~= áë= íê~åëÑÉêêÉÇ= ÉäÉÅíêçåáÅ~ääó= çê= ìëÉÇ= áå= ~å= áåÅçãé~íáÄäÉ=
ÅçãéìíÉê= ÉåîáêçåãÉåíK= = qê~åëÑÉêÉÉ= ëçäÉäó= ~ÅÅÉéíë= íÜÉ=êáëâë= ~ëëçÅá~íÉÇ= ïáíÜI= ~åÇ= íÜÉ=êÉëéçåëáÄáäáíó= ÑçêI= ~åó= Ç~ã~ÖÉë= íç= Ü~êÇï~êÉI= ëçÑíï~êÉI=
ÅçãéìíÉê=ëóëíÉãëI=çê=åÉíïçêâë=êÉä~íÉÇ=íç=íÜÉ=a~í~Ûë=íê~åëÑÉê=çê=ìëÉK==dÉåëäÉê=ëÜ~ää=Ü~îÉ=åç=êÉëéçåëáÄáäáíó=íç=éêçîáÇÉ=ëçÑíï~êÉ=çê=íê~áåáåÖ=íç=
~ääçï=qê~åëÑÉêÉÉ=íç=ìëÉ=íÜÉ=a~í~K=
QK=
dÉåëäÉê=ëÜ~ää=Ü~îÉ=åç=Çìíó=íç=ãçÇáÑó=çê=ìéÇ~íÉ=íÜÉ=a~í~K==dÉåëäÉê=ã~ó=êÉí~áå=~å=~êÅÜáî~ä=Åçéó=çÑ=íÜÉ=a~í~I=ïÜáÅÜ=ëÜ~ää=ÄÉ=ÅçåÅäìëáîÉ=éêççÑ=
~åÇ=ÖçîÉêå=áå=~åó=ÇáëéìíÉ=çîÉê=íÜÉ=a~í~Ûë=Ñçêã=çê=ÅçåíÉåíK=
RK=
qê~åëÑÉêÉÉ= ~ÖêÉÉë= íç= áåÇÉãåáÑóI= ÇÉÑÉåÇ= ~åÇ= ÜçäÇ= dÉåëäÉêI= áíë= çÑÑáÅÉêëI= ÇáêÉÅíçêëI= ëÜ~êÉÜçäÇÉêëI= ÉãéäçóÉÉëI= ~ÖÉåíëI= ~åÇ= Åçåëìäí~åíë= Ü~êãäÉëë=
Ñêçã=~åÇ=~Ö~áåëí=~åó=~åÇ=~ää=Åä~áãëI=äá~ÄáäáíáÉëI=ëìáíëI=ÇÉã~åÇëI=äçëëÉëI=Ç~ã~ÖÉëI=ÅçëíëI=~åÇ=ÉñéÉåëÉëI=áåÅäìÇáåÖI=Äìí=åçí=äáãáíÉÇ=íçI=êÉ~ëçå~ÄäÉ=
~ííçêåÉóëÛ= ÑÉÉë= ~åÇ= ~ää= äÉÖ~ä= ÉñéÉåëÉë= ~åÇ= ÑÉÉë= áåÅìêêÉÇ= íÜêçìÖÜ= ~ééÉ~äI= ~åÇ= ~ää= áåíÉêÉëí= íÜÉêÉçåI= ~ÅÅêìáåÖ= íç= çê= êÉëìäíáåÖ= Ñêçã= ~åó= ~åÇ= ~ää=
éÉêëçåëI=Ñáêãë=çê=~åó=çíÜÉê=äÉÖ~ä=ÉåíáíáÉë=çå=~ÅÅçìåí=çÑ=~åó=Ç~ã~ÖÉë=çê=äçëëÉë=íç=éêçéÉêíó=çê=éÉêëçåëI=áåÅäìÇáåÖI=Äìí=åçí=äáãáíÉÇ=íçI=áåàìêáÉëI=
ÇÉ~íÜ= çê= ÉÅçåçãáÅ= äçëëÉëI= ~êáëáåÖ= çìí= çÑ= qê~åëÑÉêÉÉÛë= çê= líÜÉêëÛ= ìëÉI= êÉìëÉI= íê~åëÑÉêI= çê= ãçÇáÑáÅ~íáçå= çÑ= íÜÉ= a~í~I= ÉñÅÉéí= ïÜÉêÉ= ~= Åçìêí= çê=
Ñçêìã=çÑ=ÅçãéÉíÉåí=àìêáëÇáÅíáçå=ÇÉíÉêãáåÉë=íÜ~í=dÉåëäÉê=áë=ëçäÉäó=äá~ÄäÉ=Ñçê=ëìÅÜ=Ç~ã~ÖÉë=çê=äçëëÉëK=
SK=
fÑ=qê~åëÑÉêÉÉ=Ñ~áäë=íç=éÉêÑçêã=çê=çÄëÉêîÉ=~åó=çÑ=íÜÉ=íÉêãë=çÑ=íÜáë=^ÖêÉÉãÉåíI=dÉåëäÉê=ã~ó=ÇÉã~åÇI=~åÇ=qê~åëÑÉêÉÉ=áããÉÇá~íÉäó=ëÜ~ää=êÉíìêåI=
íÜÉ=a~í~=~åÇ=~åó=ÅçéáÉë=íÜÉêÉçÑK=
TK=
qç=íÜÉ=ÉñíÉåí=íÜÉ=a~í~=áåÅäìÇÉ=ÄìáäÇáåÖ=áåÑçêã~íáçå=ãçÇÉäë=E7jçÇÉäëÒFI=íÜÉ=é~êíáÉë=~ÖêÉÉ=íç=íÜÉ=ÑçääçïáåÖ=~ÇÇáíáçå~ä=íÉêãëW=EáF=qÜÉ=jçÇÉäë=
~êÉ= áåíÉåÇÉÇ= Ñçê= íÜÉ= éìêéçëÉ= çÑ= ÅçããìåáÅ~íáåÖ= ÇÉëáÖå= áåíÉåíK= = tÜáäÉ= íÜÉó= ã~ó= ÄÉ= ÜÉäéÑìä= íç= áääìëíê~íÉ= ÅçåÑäáÅíë= çê= áåÅçåëáëíÉåÅáÉë= áå= íÜÉ=
ÇÉëáÖåI=íÜÉ=jçÇÉäë=ã~ó=åçí=ÇÉíÉÅí=~ää=ÅçåÑäáÅíë=çê=áåÅçåëáëíÉåÅáÉëK==EááF=^åó=ìëÉ=çÑ=íÜÉ=jçÇÉäë=Ñçê=íÜÉ=éìêéçëÉ=çÑ=ÖÉåÉê~íáåÖ=èì~åíáíó=í~âÉJçÑÑë=
çê=Åçëí=Éëíáã~íÉëI=çê=Ñçê=Ñ~ÄêáÅ~íáçåI=ïáää=ÄÉ=~í=íÜÉ=qê~åëÑÉêÉÉÛë=ëçäÉ=êáëâK==EáááF=^ë=ïáíÜ=dÉåëäÉêÛë=çíÜÉê=ëÉêîáÅÉë=~åÇ=ÇÉäáîÉê~ÄäÉëI=íÜÉ=jçÇÉäë=ïáää=
ÄÉ=éêÉé~êÉÇ=ìëáåÖ=íÜ~í=ÇÉÖêÉÉ=çÑ=ëâáää=~åÇ=Å~êÉ=ÉñÉêÅáëÉÇ=Äó=äáÅÉåëÉÇ=éêçÑÉëëáçå~äë=éê~ÅíáÅáåÖ=áå=íÜÉ=ë~ãÉ=ÅçããìåáíóI=ìåÇÉê=íÜÉ=ë~ãÉ=çê=ëáãáä~ê=
ÅáêÅìãëí~åÅÉëK==qÜÉ=jçÇÉäë=ã~ó=Åçåí~áåI=çê=ÄÉ=Ä~ëÉÇ=ìéçåI=Ç~í~=çê=áåÑçêã~íáçå=éêçîáÇÉÇ=Äó=çíÜÉêëK==dÉåëäÉê=Ü~ë=êÉäáÉÇ=ìéçå=ëìÅÜ=Ç~í~=çê=
áåÑçêã~íáçå=~ë=áë=ÅçåëáëíÉåí=ïáíÜ=íÜáë=ëí~åÇ~êÇ=çÑ=Å~êÉK==EáîF=fåÑçêã~íáçå=Åçåí~áåÉÇ=áå=íÜÉ=jçÇÉäë=ïáää=åçí=ÄÉ=ÅçåëíêìÉÇ=íç=ÇáÅí~íÉ=ÅçåëíêìÅíáçå=
ãÉ~åë=çê=ãÉíÜçÇëI=ïÜáÅÜ=ïáää=êÉã~áå=íÜÉ=Åçåíê~ÅíçêÛë=êÉëéçåëáÄáäáíóK==EîF=qç=íÜÉ=ÉñíÉåí=çÑ=~åó=ÅçåÑäáÅí=ÄÉíïÉÉå=áåÑçêã~íáçå=Åçåí~áåÉÇ=áåI=çê=
ÖÉåÉê~íÉÇ=ÄóI=íÜÉ=jçÇÉäë=~åÇ=dÉåëäÉêÛë=Çê~ïáåÖë=~åÇ=ëéÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåëI=íÜÉ=ä~ííÉê=ÇçÅìãÉåíë=ïáää=éêÉî~áäK=
UK=
qÜáë=^ÖêÉÉãÉåí=ëÜ~ää=ÄÉ=ÖçîÉêåÉÇ=Äó=íÜÉ=ä~ï=çÑ=íÜÉ=äçÅ~íáçå=çÑ=dÉåëäÉêÛë=çÑÑáÅÉ=áÇÉåíáÑáÉÇ=~í=íÜÉ=Äçííçã=çÑ=íÜáë=^ÖêÉÉãÉåíK=
VK=
få=~åó=äÉÖ~ä=éêçÅÉÉÇáåÖ=íç=ÉåÑçêÅÉ=íÜáë=^ÖêÉÉãÉåíI=íÜÉ=éêÉî~áäáåÖ=é~êíó=ëÜ~ää=ÄÉ=ÉåíáíäÉÇ=íç=êÉÅçîÉê=áíë=êÉ~ëçå~ÄäÉ=~ííçêåÉóëÛ=ÑÉÉë=~åÇ=Åçëíë=çÑ=
ÇÉÑÉåëÉK=
NMK= råäÉëë=çíÜÉêïáëÉ=ÉñéäáÅáíäó=~ÖêÉÉÇ=íç=áå=ïêáíáåÖ=Äó=íÜÉ=é~êíáÉëI=íÜáë=^ÖêÉÉãÉåí=ëÜ~ää=ÖçîÉêå=~åó=~åÇ=~ää=ÑìíìêÉ=Ç~í~=íê~åëÑÉêë=íç=qê~åëÑÉêÉÉ=Äó=
dÉåëäÉêK=
Gensler Authorization by
Date Signed
Transferee Authorization
by
Date Signed
=
âWyNOKTQSUKMMRyÇçÅìãÉåí~íáçåyR=J=ÇÉëáÖå=C=ëéÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåëyRéë=J=éêçàÉÅí=ã~åì~äI=ëéÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåëyMMSMMQ|Ç~í~=íê~åëÑÉê=~ÖêÉÉãÉåí|ÑçêãKÇçÅñ=
=
=
aq|MUNONM=
jçêêáëíçïå=
NM=kçêíÜ=m~êâ=mä~ÅÉ=
pìáíÉ=QMM=
kÉï=gÉêëÉó==MTVSM=
qÉäW= VTPKOVMKURMM=
c~ñW= VTPKOVMKURUR
Gensler
oÉèìÉëí=cçê=fåíÉêéêÉí~íáçå
Project
RFI Number
To
Date
Attention
Project Number
From
File
Issued by
Drawing Sheet/
Location
Subject
Detail
Distribution
Specifications Page
Number
6RFI
This is page
1 of
mêçÄäÉãI=`~ìëÉ=~åÇ=mêçéçëÉÇ=pçäìíáçå=E~íí~ÅÜ=ëâÉíÅÜÉë=~ë=åÉÅÉëë~êóF=
Effect on Schedule
Effect on Cost
oÉéäó=
Reply Needed by
Signature
Date
=
âWyNOKTQSUKMMRyÇçÅìãÉåí~íáçåyR=J=ÇÉëáÖå=C=ëéÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåëyRéë=J=éêçàÉÅí=ã~åì~äI=ëéÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåëyMMSMMR|êÉèìÉëí=Ñçê=áåíÉêéêÉí~íáçå|ÑçêãKÇçÅñ=
=
=
of|MOORNN=
pìáíÉ=QMM=
kÉï=gÉêëÉó==TVSM=
c~ñW= VTPKOVMKURUR=
Gensler
pìÄëíáíìíáçå=oÉèìÉëí=
Project
Date
Project Location
Project Number
General Contractor
File
Prepared by
This is page
6S
1 of
tÉ=ÅÉêíáÑó=íÜ~í=íÜÉ=ÑçääçïáåÖ=éêçÇìÅí=áë=Éèì~ä=çê=ëìéÉêáçê=íç=íÜÉ=ëéÉÅáÑáÉÇ=éêçÇìÅí=áå=~ééÉ~ê~åÅÉI=Çìê~ÄáäáíóI=éÉêÑçêã~åÅÉI=~åÇ=áå=ÉîÉêó=çíÜÉê=êÉëéÉÅíI=~åÇ=ïÉ=ÜÉêÉÄó=
ëìÄãáí=áí=Ñçê=óçìê=ÅçåëáÇÉê~íáçå=~ë=~=ëìÄëíáíìíÉ=Ñçê=íÜÉ=ëéÉÅáÑáÉÇ=áíÉã=Ñçê=íÜÉ=~ÄçîÉJãÉåíáçåÉÇ=éêçàÉÅíW=
1.
Specified Item
2.
Proposed Substitution
Section
3.
Reason for Substitution
4.
Costs EmêçîáÇÉ=~=ÅçãéäÉíÉ=ÄêÉ~âÇçïå=çÑ=ÅçëíëI=áåÅäìÇáåÖ=íÜÉ=Åçëí=~ãçìåí=íç=ÄÉ=abar`qba=Ñêçã=íÜÉ=`çåíê~Åí=pìã=áÑ=íÜÉ=éêçéçëÉÇ=ëìÄëíáíìíáçå=áë=
~ÅÅÉéíÉÇK=fåÅäìÇÉ=ÇçÅìãÉåí~íáçå=Ñçê=ÄçíÜ=ã~íÉêá~äë=~åÇ=ä~ÄçêKF
5.
Schedule EaÉëÅêáÄÉ=ëìÄëíáíìíáçåDë=~ÑÑÉÅí=çå=ÅçåëíêìÅíáçå=ëÅÜÉÇìäÉF
6.
Supporting Data
•
Cutsheets: Attach complete technical data, including laboratory tests, if applicable.
•
Installation: Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications describing the steps that the proposed
substitution will require for its proper installation.
•
Samples: Submit with request all necessary samples and substantiating data clearly marked to prove equal quality and performance to that
which is specified.
7.
List ways in which the substitution affects dimensions shown on Drawings.
8.
List affects of proposed substitution on other trades
9.
List ways in which proposed substitution will be affected by applicable code requirements and agency approval
10.
List differences between proposed substitution and specified item
11.
Manufacturer's warranties of the proposed and specified items are:
Same
Different
Explain
12.
List information on availability of maintenance service and source of replacement materials
13.
Certification of, and Assumption of Liability for, Equivalent Performance
qÜÉ=ìåÇÉêëáÖåÉÇ=ÅÉêíáÑáÉë=íÜ~í=íÜÉ=ÑìåÅíáçåI=~ééÉ~ê~åÅÉ=~åÇ=èì~äáíó=çÑ=íÜÉ=éêçéçëÉÇ=ëìÄëíáíìíáçå=áë=Éèìáî~äÉåí=çê=ëìéÉêáçê=íç=íÜÉ=ëéÉÅáÑáÉÇ=áíÉã=~åÇ=áë=áå=Ñìää=
Åçãéäá~åÅÉ=ïáíÜ=íÜÉ=`çåíê~Åí=açÅìãÉåíë=~åÇ=~ééäáÅ~ÄäÉ=êÉÖìä~íçêó=êÉèìáêÉãÉåíëK=
Supplier
Signature
Telephone No.
Date
páÖå~íìêÉ=ãìëí=ÄÉ=Äó=éÉêëçå=~ìíÜçêáòÉÇ=íç=äÉÖ~ääó=ÄáåÇ=ÜáëLÜÉê=Ñáêã=íç=íÜÉ=~ÄçîÉ=íÉêãëK=c~áäìêÉ=íç=éêçîáÇÉ=äÉÖ~ääó=ÄáåÇáåÖ=ëáÖå~íìêÉ=ïáää=êÉëìäí=áå=êÉíê~Åíáçå=çÑ=
~ééêçî~äK=
General Contractor
Signature
Telephone No.
Date
=
â:\12.7468.005\documentation\5 - design & specifications\5ps - project manual, specifications\006006_substitution
request_form.docx=
pìáíÉ=QMM=
=
=
po|MUNONM=
c~ñW= VTPKOVMKURUR=
Gensler
_ìääÉíáå=kìãÄÉê== = = = = =
Project
Date
Project Location
Architect's Project Number
Owner/Client
File
This is page
6BL
To
1 of
Attention
Address
City
State
Delivered via:
Messenger
Hand carried
Facsimile
Express
Pick-up
E-mail Address
Mail
UPS
Website Address
Zip
Code
This Bulletin Conveys to Contractor=E`ÜÉÅâ=çåÉ=çÑ=íÜÉ=ÑçääçïáåÖ=ÑáîÉ=ÅÜçáÅÉëKF:=
Architect's Authorization for Minor Changes
=
=
^êÅÜáíÉÅí=êÉÅçããÉåÇë=ãçÇáÑáÅ~íáçåë=íç=íÜÉ=tçêâ=~ë=ÇÉëÅêáÄÉÇ=ÄÉäçïK
Architect's Clarification / Supplemental Instructions ErëÉ=íÜáë=_ìääÉíáå=Ñçêã=áå=éä~ÅÉ=çÑ=^êÅÜáíÉÅíDë=pìééäÉãÉåí~ä=fåëíêìÅíáçåë=ÑçêãKF
`çåíê~Åíçê=ëÜ~ää=Å~êêó=çìí=íÜÉ=tçêâ=áå=~ÅÅçêÇ~åÅÉ=ïáíÜ=íÜÉ=ÑçääçïáåÖ=ëìééäÉãÉåí~ä=áåëíêìÅíáçåëK
Architect's Confirmation of a Field Order ErëÉ=íÜáë=_ìääÉíáå=Ñçêã=áå=éä~ÅÉ=çÑ=~=cáÉäÇ=lêÇÉê=ÑçêãKF
=
qÜáë=ÅçåÑáêãë=^êÅÜáíÉÅíDë=îÉêÄ~ä=áåëíêìÅíáçåë=íç=EáåÇáîáÇì~äDë=å~ãÉF=
=çå=EÇ~íÉF=
I=~ë=ÇÉëÅêáÄÉÇ=ÄÉäçïK=
kçíÉW=qÜÉ=~ÄçîÉ=íÜêÉÉ=ÅÜçáÅÉë=~êÉ=É~ÅÜ=ëìÄàÉÅí=íç=íÜÉ=ÑçääçïáåÖ=íÉêãëW=qÜÉ=ÅÜ~åÖÉEëFI=Åä~êáÑáÅ~íáçåEëF=~åÇLçê=ÅçåÑáêã~íáçåEëF=ÇÉëÅêáÄÉÇ=ÄÉäçï=áëL~êÉ=áëëìÉÇ=áå=
~ÅÅçêÇ~åÅÉ=ïáíÜ=íÜÉ=`çåíê~Åí=açÅìãÉåíëI=ïáíÜçìí=ÅÜ~åÖÉ=áå=`çåíê~Åí=pìã=~åÇLçê=qáãÉK
Architect's Request for Contractor's Proposal ErëÉ=íÜáë=_ìääÉíáå=Ñçêã=áå=éä~ÅÉ=çÑ=~å=bëíáã~íÉ=oÉèìÉëí=ÑçêãKF
=
mäÉ~ëÉ=ëìÄãáí=~å=áíÉãáòÉÇ=éêçéçë~ä=Ñçê=ÅÜ~åÖÉë=áå=íÜÉ=`çåíê~Åí=pìã=~åÇLçê=qáãÉ=Ñçê=éêçéçëÉÇ=ãçÇáÑáÅ~íáçåë=íç=íÜÉ=`çåíê~Åí=açÅìãÉåíë=ÇÉëÅêáÄÉÇ=ÜÉêÉáåK=
pìÄãáí=éêçéçë~ä=ïáíÜáå==
ïáíÜáå==
=Ç~óë=çê=åçíáÑó=íÜÉ=^êÅÜáíÉÅí=áå=ïêáíáåÖ=çÑ=íÜÉ=Ç~íÉ=çå=ïÜáÅÜ=óçì=~åíáÅáé~íÉ=ëìÄãáííáåÖ=óçìê=éêçéçë~äK=qÜáë=áë=åçí=~=`Ü~åÖÉ=lêÇÉê=
Ç~óë
çê=~=`çåëíêìÅíáçå=`Ü~åÖÉ=aáêÉÅíáîÉ=çê=~=ÇáêÉÅíáçå=íç=éêçÅÉÉÇ=ïáíÜ=íÜÉ=tçêâ=ÇÉëÅêáÄÉÇ=áå=íÜÉ=éêçéçëÉÇ=ãçÇáÑáÅ~íáçåëK
Other: =
^ë=ÇÉëÅêáÄÉÇ=ÄÉäçïK
Attachments
Requested by
= ^êÅÜáíÉÅí=
= lïåÉê=
= `çåíê~Åíçê=
= líÜÉê=EëéÉÅáÑóFW=
Issued by Gensler by
Date Signed
Issued by Owner by
Date Signed
= oÉèìáêÉÇX=mäÉ~ëÉ=êÉíìêå=ëáÖåÉÇ=Åçéó=íç=dÉåëäÉê=
= kçí=oÉèìáêÉÇ
Accepted by Contractor by
= oÉèìáêÉÇX=mäÉ~ëÉ=êÉíìêå=ëáÖåÉÇ=Åçéó=íç=dÉåëäÉê=
Date Signed
= kçí=oÉèìáêÉÇ
Distribution
Prepared by Gensler by
Date Signed
Instructions / Description / References / Dates
Begin text here . . .
=
:\12.7468.005\documentation\5 - design & specifications\5ps - project manual,
specifications\006007_bulletin_form.docx=
â
=
=
_i|MUNONM=
pìáíÉ=QMM=
c~ñW= VTPKOVMKURUR
Formatted: Font: Verdana
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Project information.
Work covered by Contract Documents.
Work under separate contracts.
Purchase contracts.
Owner-furnished, Contractor-installed products.
Specification and drawing conventions.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work of all Sections in
the Specifications. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one
shall be as binding as if required by all.
B.
Conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents shall be resolved in the following
order of priority:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.4
Contract modifications (such as Change Orders and Bulletins) of later date take
precedence over those of earlier date;
the Agreement;
Addenda of later date take precedence over those of earlier date;
the Supplementary Conditions;
The General Conditions;
Drawings and Specifications; Drawings govern Specifications for quantity and location.
Specifications govern Drawings for quality and performance. In the event of ambiguity
or conflicts, the greater quantity and the better quality shall govern.
PROJECT INFORMATION
A.
Project Identification: Novartis, Project Number 12.7468.005
1.
Project Location:
SUMMARY
Building 200 – Ground Floor
01 10 00 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
One Health Plaza, East Hanover NJ.
B.
Owner: Novartis.
C.
Architect: Gensler, 10 North Park Place, Morristown, NJ 07960.
1.5
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the interior
construction of the ground floor at the above referenced address.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.6
Architectural Work.
Mechanical Work.
Electrical Work.
Plumbing Work.
Fire Protection Work.
WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS
A.
1.7
General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried
out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts.
Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.
PURCHASE CONTRACTS
A.
General: Owner has negotiated purchase contracts with suppliers of material and equipment to
be incorporated into the Work. Owner will assign these purchase contracts to Contractor.
Include costs for purchasing, receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material
and equipment in the Contract Sum, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
1.8
Contractor's responsibilities are same as if Contractor had negotiated purchase contracts,
including responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final purchasing
agreements.
OWNER-FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR-INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A.
Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling,
storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to
Contractor.
Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be
present for and assist in Owner's inspection.
If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for
replacement.
SUMMARY
01 10 00 - 2
Gensler
12.7468.005
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.9
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's
warranties to Contractor.
Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished
products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall
designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them
noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product. Examples of
discrepancies or problems include, but are not limited to, coordination issues.
If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor
shall repair or replace them.
SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The
words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
otherwise.
Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are
described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to
identify materials and products:
1.
2.
3.
Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in
the individual Specifications Sections.
Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part
of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.
Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing
Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01 10 00
SUMMARY
01 10 00 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable
product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
Divisions 03 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations for
substitutions.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1.
2.
1.4
Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or
unavailability of required warranty terms.
Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not
required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to
Contractor or Owner.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
2.
Substitution Request Form: Use form provided as Section 00 60 06 "Substitution
Request."
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a.
Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be
provided, if applicable.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01 25 00 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
3.
Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
a.
b.
1.5
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other
parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work
specified.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
Research reports evidencing compliance with construction code regulations in
effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction
Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays
in delivery.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible
with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.
Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Compatibility of Substitutions:
Investigate and document compatibility of proposed
substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform
compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
01 25 00 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.6
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved
substitutions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for
change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related
submittals.
1.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
B.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified
product provided for achieving LEED prerequisites and credits.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received
within 30 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be
considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.
1.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a.
b.
Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities
Owner must assume.
Owner's additional responsibilities may include
compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of
other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
01 25 00 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified
product provided for achieving LEED prerequisites and credits.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
01 25 00 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 01 26 00 − CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A.
1.3
Architect may issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on form included at end of
Part 3.
PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A.
Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1.
2.
Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them
instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
Within 5 days unless otherwise provided in the General Conditions after receipt of
Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum
and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a.
b.
B.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting
an extension of the Contract Time.
Contractor-Initiated Proposals (Change Order Requests): If latent or unforeseen conditions
require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request
for a change.
1.
2.
3.
Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01 26 00 - 1
Gensler
12.7468.005
4.
C.
1.4
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the
proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system
specified.
Proposal Request Form: Use Gensler "Bulletin," selecting, Architect's Request for Contractor's
Proposal."
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A.
On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures
of Owner and Contractor on Gensler "Change Order" form included at end of Part 3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
01250/9-98/ttt
01 26 00 - 2
Gensler
12.7468.005
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
01 26 00 - 3
Gensler
12.7468.005
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
01 26 00 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 01 26 13 − REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Requests for Interpretation.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Requests for Interpretation (RFI): Contractor initiated written instrument related to the
execution of the Work that is addressed to the Architect. The RFI shall be used by the
Contractor as the means to ask questions related to the Work; subject to the conditions
contained within this Section.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Requests for Interpretation: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information
or interpretation and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Project name.
Project number.
Date.
Name of Contractor.
Name of Architect.
RFI number, numbered sequentially.
RFI subject.
Reference to appropriate documents:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
9.
10.
11.
Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs.
Drawing number and detail references.
Schedule.
Bulletin number.
Other Contract Documents, if any.
Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the
Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
Contractor's and RFI Manager's signature.
REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI)
01 26 13 - 1
Gensler
12.7468.005
12.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items
needing interpretation.
a.
B.
RFI Forms: Use Form provided as Section 00 60 05 "Request for Interpretation."
1.
1.5
Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected
materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFI organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.6
Project name.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of Architect.
RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
RFI description.
Date the RFI was submitted.
Date Architect's response was received.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Authorship: Prior to the commencement of the RFI process, designate a full time "RFI
Manager" whose duties shall include the responsibility for enforcing the Request for
Interpretation provisions of this Article, to maintain an up-to-date log of all RFI, advise the
Architect, in writing, of the status and disposition of all RFI at the progress meetings, and be a
member of the Contractor's staff. The RFI Manager shall be experienced in administration and
supervision of the type of Work indicated on the Contract Documents.
1.
2.
1.7
RFI Manager may be the Contractor's Job Superintendent.
Each RFI shall originate solely from the RFI Manager. An RFI submitted to the
Architect by an entity, or individual, other than the RFI Manager shall be returned to the
Contractor.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Processing Time: Allow 5 working days for Architect's response for each RFI.
1.
2.
Allow additional time if coordination with other work is required. Architect will advise
Contractor when a RFI being processed must be delayed for coordination.
Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
01 26 13 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
B.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Architect's action on RFI that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum
may be eligible for Contractor to submit Proposal Request according to Division 01 Section
"Contract Modification Procedures."
1.
C.
If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.
Frivolous RFI:
1.
RFI shall not be used for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
1.8
Request for approval of submittals.
Request approval of substitutions.
Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
Request for adjustment in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents, or to transfer coordination responsibility from the Contractor to the
Owner or Architect.
Incomplete RFI or inaccurately prepared RFI.
The Owner reserves the right to assess the Contractor for the cost (based on time and
materials) of a RFI response performed by the Architect, and any of its consultants,
which is deemed by the Owner and the Architect as being frivolous or unnecessary.
Frivolous RFI shall be removed from the RFI log.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of RFI with performance of construction
activities.
1.
Submit RFI with such promptness as to cause no delays in the Work. No adjustments of
Contract Time or Contract Sum will be granted because of failure to have an RFI
submitted with sufficient time to allow for the orderly processing of a response by the
Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S ACTION
A.
General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of
the Contract Documents, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1.
Architect will return RFI submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor
with no response.
01 26 13 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
B.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Prior to submission of the RFI, coordinate the nature of the inquiry with the requirements of
other Sections or trades as related thereto and responses to previous RFI.
C.
Complete each blank on the RFI form.
D.
In preparing each RFI verify the applicable dimension(s), field conditions, Drawing
requirements (small through large scale details), and/or Specification section requirements
pertaining thereto.
E.
Each RFI shall be reviewed, and signed by the RFI Manager prior to transmitting to the
Architect.
F.
On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within 7 days if Contractor disagrees
with response.
1.
3.2
Include identification of related Minor Change in the Work and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.
1.
B.
Frivolous RFI will be returned without action.
RFI which fail to conform to requirements, (for example, is incomplete or contain numerous
errors) shall be returned to the Contractor without a response. No adjustments for Contract
Time or Contract Sum shall be granted for an RFI failing to conform to requirements.
01 26 13 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 01 29 00 − PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process
Applications for Payment.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
(Field) Review: Architect's visits to the site at intervals necessary in the judgment of Architect
to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the Work completed and to
determine in general if the Work completed is in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the
quality or quantity of the Work.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of
1.
Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
B.
Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
Submittals Schedule.
Submit the Schedule of Values at earliest possible date but before the date scheduled for
submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased
payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.
Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items
for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1.
Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Project name and location.
Name of Architect.
Architect's project number.
Contractor's name and address.
Date of submittal.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01 29 00 - 1
Gensler
12.7468.005
2.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Related Specification Section or Division.
Description of the Work.
Name of subcontractor.
Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
Name of supplier.
Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
Dollar value.
1)
3.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project
Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,
where appropriate.
a.
4.
5.
7.
1.4
Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include
evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required.
Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a.
8.
Break down principal subcontract amounts into separate labor and materials items.
Breakdown of subcontractor's schedule of values must be true and accurate.
Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed.
a.
6.
Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted
to total 100 percent.
Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of
Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders result in a change in the Contract Sum.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A.
Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified and paid for by Owner.
1.
Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01 29 00 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
B.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Payment Application Review:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Prior to the 25th day of each month, furnish the Architect with a draft (pencil) copy of the
Application for Payment.
On the 25th day of each month, the Owner, the Architect and the Contractor shall meet to
review the draft (pencil) copy of the application and Certificate for payment. Questions
resulting from this review shall be answered by the Contractor and clarified prior to
receipt of the final copy of the Application and Certificate for Payment that is to be
submitted to the Architect on the 1st day of the following month.
Upon receipt of the final Application and Certificate for Payment and other
documentation as required by the Architect including the updated Schedule of Values and
the updated Construction Schedule, the Architect shall review the documents received to
determine if they correspond to the agreements reached during the draft (pencil) copy
review. Upon completion of the Architect's review, the Architect shall revise and execute
the Applications and Certificate for Payment to correspond to the agreements reached and
forward the executed copies to the Owner.
In taking action on the contractor's Application and Certificate for Payment, the Architect
will rely on the accuracy and completeness of the information furnished by the contractor
and will not be deemed to represent that he has made audits of the supporting data.
Payment will not be made for materials and equipment stored off the site, except at the
Owner's discretion and prior approval. When the Application and Certificate for
Payment includes material or equipment stored off-site, the Application shall be
accompanied by a statement certifying:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Description of the item(s) being stored.
Location of the bonded warehouse(s) where materials or equipment is being stored.
Affidavit of Storage.
Certificate of Insurance.
Bill of sale made to Owner stating there will be no additional cost for
transportation and delivery of the item(s) being stored.
Statement certifying that item or any part thereof will not be installed in any
construction other than work under this Contract.
C.
Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation
Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
D.
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Incomplete applications will be
returned without action.
1.
2.
E.
Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
Include amounts of Change Orders issued before last day of construction period covered
by application.
Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment by
a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar
attachments if required.
1.
Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01 29 00 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
F.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit notarized waivers of
mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of
the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for retainage,
on each item.
When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of
mechanic's lien for construction period covered by the application.
a.
5.
G.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
List of subcontractors, principal suppliers and fabricators.
Schedule of Values.
Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
Products list.
Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).
List of Contractor's staff assignments.
List of Contractor's principal consultants.
Copies of building permits.
Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for
performance of the Work.
Report of preconstruction conference.
Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance coverage(s).
Performance and payment bonds.
Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of
the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1.
2.
I.
Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to
Owner.
Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
H.
Submit final Application for Payment with or proceeded by final waivers from
every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application
who is lawfully entitled to a lien.
Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the
following:
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01 29 00 - 4
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements, including, but not limited to:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Transmittal of required Project Record Documents to Owner.
Evidence of completion of demonstration and training.
Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims" and AIA
Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
Evidence that claims have been settled.
Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.
Occupancy permits and similar approvals or certifications by governing authorities and
franchised services, assuring Owner's full access and use of completed work.
01290/9-98/ttt
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01 29 00 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
General project coordination procedures.
Coordination drawings.
Project meetings.
A.
Coordination drawings.
B.
Meeting minutes.
1.3
GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.4
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of
the Work.
COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A.
Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in
individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop
Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is
required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than
one entity.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 31 00 - 1
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to
indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed
data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
B.
Use applicable Contract Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination
drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe
relationship of various systems and components.
Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated
replacement of components during the life of the installation.
Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,
valves, and other controls.
Indicate required installation sequences.
Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that
appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance
requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed
resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations
will not be considered changes to the Contract.
Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and
mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations
of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan
drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.
Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical
and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to
accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict
between light fixtures and other components.
Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans
and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical
equipment.
Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of
embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door
floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and
similar items.
Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:
a.
b.
c.
7.
Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including
insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.
Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access
doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.
Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.
Electrical Work: Show the following:
a.
Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and
larger.
01 31 00 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
b.
c.
d.
8.
Fire-Protection System: Show the following:
a.
9.
1.5
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other firealarm locations.
Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor
control center locations.
Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.
Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler
heads.
Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being
coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's
responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared
in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform
Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
Agenda: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will prepare the meeting agenda.
Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions
and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned,
including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
B.
Pre-Construction Conference: Schedule and conduct a pre-construction conference before
starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect.
C.
Pre-Installation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1.
D.
Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals that reflects the stage of the
work
1.
2.
Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
Schedule Updating: Comply with requirements in Section 01 32 00 "Construction
Progress Documentation."
01 31 00 - 3
Gensler
12.7468.005
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
013100/02-10/pbb
01 31 00 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 01 32 00 − CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the
early start of the following activity.
Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without
adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals Schedule: Within 30 days after the execution of the Agreement between the Owner
and the Contractor submit to the Architect and Owner copies of the submittals schedule.
Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Scheduled date for first submittal.
Specification Section number and title.
Submittal category (action or informational).
Description of the Work covered.
Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
B.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit, for the Owner's and Architect's information,
copies of the Contractor's Construction Schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for
entire construction period.
C.
Field Condition Reports: Submit copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
01 32 00 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
B.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of
subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required
schedules and reports.
1.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A.
Preparation: Submit, for Architect's approval, concurrently with the Contractor's Construction
Schedule a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by
construction schedule. Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
2.2
Anticipated date of Architect's receipt of submittal.
Number of business days allowed for Architect's review of submittal.
Specification Section to which submittal relates.
Subcontractor, fabricator or supplier responsible for preparing the submittal.
Provide blank columns for actual date of submittal, re-submittal, and final-review status.
Systems Submittals: Identify submittals for systems such as fire alarms, and sprinklers,
on the transmittal and act upon the system singularly as a combined submittal.
Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning &
Scheduling."
B.
Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of Final
Completion.
1.
C.
Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days.
Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and
major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule.
Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals,
purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01
Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Include selection process activities for
finishes and products specified by allowances or specified to be selected during the
01 32 00 - 2
Gensler
12.7468.005
4.
5.
D.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
sample review process. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction
Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than five (5) days for startup and testing.
Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for administrative procedures necessary for
certification of Substantial Completion.
Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.
Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5.
Coordination with existing construction.
Limitations of continued occupancies.
Uninterruptible services.
Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
Use of premises restrictions.
Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Subcontract awards.
Submittals.
Purchases.
Mockups.
Fabrication.
Deliveries.
Installation.
Tests and inspections.
Adjusting.
Startup and placement into final use and operation.
E.
Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.
F.
Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on
the overall project schedule.
2.3
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
A.
Gantt-Chart Schedule: Immediately after being awarded the Contract, prepare and submit, for
the Owners and Architect's information, a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Ganttchart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule. The schedule shall be related to the entire
Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for the expeditious
and practical execution of the Work.
01 32 00 - 3
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
B.
2.4
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Allow a minimum of 10 working days for processing (from date Architect receives
submittal until date he sends it back) and sufficient time for proper handling, review,
fabrication and delivery.
Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)
A.
General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.
B.
CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a CPM network analysis
diagram.
1.
2.
C.
Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting
progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.
Use "one workday" as the unit of time.
CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work.
Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical
paths.
1.
Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship
of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the
following activities:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
Processing: Process data to produce output data or a computer-drawn, time-scaled
network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary
to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.
Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate
paths with most float near the edges.
a.
D.
Preparation and processing of submittals.
Purchase of materials.
Delivery.
Fabrication.
Installation.
Utility interruptions.
Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractors activities.
Testing and commissioning.
Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical
path.
Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total
float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:
1.
2.
3.
Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.
Description of activity.
Principal events of activity.
01 32 00 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
E.
Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
Early and late start dates.
Early and late finish dates.
Activity duration in workdays.
Total float or slack time.
Average size of workforce.
Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the Schedule of Values).
Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports
showing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.5
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Identification of activities that have changed.
Changes in early and late start dates.
Changes in early and late finish dates.
Changes in activity durations in workdays.
Changes in the critical path.
Changes in total float or slack time.
Changes in the Contract Time.
REPORTS
A.
Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions
and the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information.
Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for
changing the Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
Give Owner and Architect a minimum of one week's notice of all anticipated revisions to
the project schedule.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, and other parties
identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.
1.
Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
01 32 00 - 5
Gensler
12.7468.005
2.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
01320/9-98/ttt
01 32 00 - 6
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 01 33 00 − SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and
for erecting mockups.
Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties, operation and
maintenance manuals, and closeout submittals.
Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual
Specification Sections as action submittals.
B.
Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with
requirements.
Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual
Specification Sections as informational submittals.
C.
File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and
from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet
protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within
which internal and external users are able to access files.
D.
Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems
used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent
fixed-layout document format.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 33 00 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.4
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Contractor's Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological
order by dates required by Contractor's Construction Schedule. Include time required for
review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include
additional time required for making corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the
Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those
corrections.
1.
2.
3.
Coordinate Submittal Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with start-up construction schedule but no later
than 10 days of Owner's authorization or Notice to Proceed. Include submittals required
during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain
orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for
manufacture or fabrication.
Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
a.
4.
Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
1.5
Submit revised Submittal Schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing
for submittals.
Scheduled date for first submittal.
Submittal category: Action or informational.
Description of the Work covered.
Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
Scheduled dates for purchasing, if necessary for critical path scheduling.
Scheduled dates for installation, if necessary for critical path scheduling.
SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of Drawings of the Contract Drawings may be provided
by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. Architect makes no representations as
to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to the Contract Documents.
1.
B.
Provide an executed Data Transfer Agreement form included as Section 00 60 04, from
each subcontractor and sub-subcontractor or supplier as a prerequisite for consideration.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1.
2.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless
partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
01 33 00 - 2
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.
4.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification
Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a.
C.
Processing Time: Promptly submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples in accordance
with the accepted Submittal Schedule, as to cause no delay in the Work. Allow enough time for
submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence
on Architect's receipt of submittal. Architect will document on submittal the date of receipt.
Submittals delivered to the Architect after 4 pm will be noted as received on the next business
day.
1.
2.
3.
Initial Review: Duration of initial submittal review shall be as agreed upon in the final
Submittal Schedule. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is
required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be
delayed for coordination. Delaying submittals to facilitate coordination between
submittals shall not constitute a delay of the Work nor shall it be the basis for an
extension of time.
Sequential Review: Sequential review is a submittal that requires review by more than
one design discipline. Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,
Owner, or other parties is required, submittal schedule shall reflect sequential review.
Concurrent Review: Concurrent review is a submittal that requires review by more than
one design discipline. Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants,
Owner, or other parties is required for critical path scheduling, Submittal Schedule shall
reflect concurrent review, if approved in advance by Architect.
a.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
Direct Transmittal to Consultant for Concurrent Review: Transmit submittals
directly to Architect's consultants, provide duplicate copy of transmittal to
Architect. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to
Contractor.
If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.
Number of days for processing each resubmittal shall be as agreed upon in the final
Submittal Schedule.
No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit
submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1.
2.
3.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
Provide a space approximately 5 inches by 6 inches on label or beside title block to
record Architect's review markings.
Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a.
b.
c.
Project name.
Date.
Name and address of Architect.
01 33 00 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of subcontractor.
Name and address of supplier.
Name of manufacturer.
Unique identifier, including revision number. Submittals shall be numbered with a
three-digit number, followed by a dash, followed by the Section number, followed
by another dash, and ending with a sequential submission number as indicated
below. The numbering system shall be retained throughout all revisions.
1)
2)
3)
i.
j.
k.
l.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Three-Digit Number: Sequential number, beginning with "001", for each
submittal transmitted to Architect for each Section.
Section Number: Section number where submittal is specified.
Submission Number: Use "0" for initial submittal, "1" for first resubmittal,
"2" for second resubmittal, and so forth.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
Other necessary identification.
E.
Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Architect.
F.
Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents
on submittals.
G.
Resubmission: Unless corrected copies are required for final submittal due to Architect's
observance of noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may
serve as final submittal.
1.
2.
H.
Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of
copies to Architect.
Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action
taken and will be returned.
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals
received from sources other than Contractor.
01 33 00 - 4
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
I.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Transmittal Form: Use the form included in Section 00 60 00 "Submittal Transmittal"
with each submittal.
Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1.
2.
3.
Note date and content of previous submittal.
Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
Resubmit submittals until they are marked "A" or "B" from Architect's action stamp.
J.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
K.
Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action "A" or "B" taken
by Architect in connection with construction.
L.
Substitution requests are not allowed in the form of submittals. Substitution requests must be
made in accordance with Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
General: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of
submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a
Project Record Document.
Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will not return copies.
Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements
specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."
Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
a.
Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications
where indicated.
Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section
01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
01 33 00 - 5
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
2.
3.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
Clearly mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are
applicable.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
4.
For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
Manufacturer's product specifications.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
Standard color charts.
Mill reports.
Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.
Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Availability and delivery time information.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
Printed performance curves.
Operational range diagrams.
Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
Shop Drawings: Prepare and submit Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale.
Do not reproduce, digitally or otherwise, the Contract Documents and submit them as shop
drawings. Contractor, subcontractors, suppliers and all other entities shall not use, copy or
reproduce title blocks, dimensions, notes, keynotes, symbols schedules or details from Contract
Drawings, digital or otherwise. Use of the Contract Drawings shall be limited to reproduction,
digitally or otherwise, of the exterior wall layout, interior partition layout, grid lines, doors, and
windows. Do not base Shop Drawings on standard printed data.
1.
Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
Dimensions.
Identification of products.
Fabrication and installation drawings.
Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and
control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
Templates and patterns.
Schedules.
Design calculations.
Compliance with specified standards.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
01 33 00 - 6
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
m.
n.
2.
3.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by
40 inches (750 by 1000 mm).
Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows:
a.
b.
C.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
Initial Submittal: Submit one correctable, reproducible or in PDF format.
Architect will return electronically.
Final Submittal: Submit one electronic PDF file, unless prints are required for
operation and maintenance manuals. Submit prints where prints are required for
operation and maintenance manuals.
Samples: Submit physical units of materials or products.
1.
2.
Comply with requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for mockups.
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a.
3.
Number of Samples: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern,
texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's
product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified,
and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
a.
Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one
Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample
set as a Project record sample.
1)
2)
4.
Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to
be demonstrated.
If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of
paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review
of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated.
Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
Generic description of Sample.
Product name or name of manufacturer.
Sample source.
01 33 00 - 7
Gensler
12.7468.005
5.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
a.
b.
6.
7.
Systems Submittals: Identify submittals for systems such as fire alarms, exterior walls,
and curtain walls, on the transmittal and act upon the system singularly as a combined
submittal. If resubmission is required, resubmit entire system submittal.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a.
b.
D.
Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
Product Schedule or List: Prepare and submit a written summary indicating types of products
required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular
form:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories
together in one submittal package.
Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that
illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections,
operation, and similar construction characteristics.
Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract
Documents.
Number and name of room or space.
Location within room or space.
Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
A.
Qualification Data: Submit written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
B.
Welding Certificates: Prepare and submit written certification that welding procedures and
personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification
(WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and
personnel certified.
C.
Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this
specific Project.
01 33 00 - 8
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
D.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience
where required.
E.
Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements.
F.
Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements.
G.
Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements.
H.
Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare and submit reports written by a qualified testing agency,
on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before
installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements.
I.
Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare and submit reports written by a qualified testing agency,
on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests
performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and
substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
J.
Field Test Reports: Prepare and submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements.
K.
Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed
by a qualified testing agency.
L.
Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with construction code regulations in
effect for Project. Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Name of evaluation organization.
Date of evaluation.
Time period when report is in effect.
Product and manufacturers' names.
Description of product.
Test procedures and results.
Limitations of use.
M.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 40 00
"Quality Requirements."
N.
Maintenance Data: Submit written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in
Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data."
01 33 00 - 9
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
O.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
P.
Preparation of substrates.
Required substrate tolerances.
Sequence of installation or erection.
Required installation tolerances.
Required adjustments.
Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare and submit written information documenting factoryauthorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative
making report.
Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
Q.
Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare and submit written information indicating current
status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond,
limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
R.
Construction Photographs:
Documentation."
S.
Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals:
01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."
2.4
Comply with requirements in Section 01 32 33 "Photographic
Refer to requirements in Section
DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A.
Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
B.
Delegated-Design Services: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit copies of signed and sealed documentation required by the Contract
Documents from the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically
assigned to the Contractor to be designed by a licensed design professional to meet specific
performance requirements.
01 33 00 - 10
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
C.
Delegated-Design Submittals:
"Quality Requirements."
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 40 00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note
corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed,
coordinated, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each properly executed submittal, make marks to
indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will reject and return
submittals not complying with requirements. Architect will stamp each submittal with a stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A - No Exceptions Taken. No further review of Submittal required.
B - Make Corrections as Noted. Incorporate corrections in Work; resubmittal is not
required. If Contractor cannot comply with corrections as noted, revise to respond to
exceptions and resubmit.
C - Revise as Noted and Resubmit. Revise as noted & resubmit for further review.
D - Resubmit Properly. Submittal not reviewed because it does not contain Contractor's
signature indicating its review and approval, and/or is not in proper condition for review.
Resubmit.
E - Not Reviewed. Submittal is not required by Contract Documents.
F - Received for Client's Record Only. Submittal not reviewed.
C.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each
submittal to appropriate party.
D.
Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be
returned without review.
1.
E.
Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial
submittals has received prior approval from Architect.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded
or returned marked "Not Reviewed."
01 33 00 - 11
Gensler
12.7468.005
F.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Substitution items received as product data, shop drawing, or sample submittals required by
individual Sections will be returned to Contractor without review. Comply with requirements in
Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for submission of substitution request.
01 33 00 - 12
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 01 40 00 − QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified
in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also
cover production of standard products.
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control
procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect,
Owner, Commissioning Authority or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by
provisions of this Section.
Section 01 73 29 "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction
disturbed by testing and inspecting activities.
Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for assembling miscellaneous record
submittals.
Divisions 03 through 33 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed
construction complies with requirements.
B.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements.
Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 40 00 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
C.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site, unless indicated otherwise.
Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review
coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to
demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples.
Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will
be judged.
1.
2.
3.
Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from
the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and
subassemblies.
Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and
ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and
equipment, and lighting.
Benchmark Samples: A type of mockup used to illustrate the application and aesthetic
effect of finishes and coatings. Benchmark Samples establish the standard by which the
Work will be judged.
D.
Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance
with specified criteria.
E.
Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
F.
Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source (e.g.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop).
G.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
H.
Testing Agency: An entity independent of the Owner's and Contractor's operations, engaged to
perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing
agency.
I.
Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1.
Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or
that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
J.
Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully
completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;
being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
K.
Professional Engineer: Engineer currently licensed to practice in the State of New Jersey.
01 40 00 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.4
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply
with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
1.5
DELEGATED DESIGN
A.
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1.
1.6
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Architect.
A.
General: Format and assemble miscellaneous record submittals to comply with requirements
specified in Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents."
1.
Distribution: Comply with the following as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Owner: One copy.
Contractor: Three copies.
Architect: One copy.
Consulting Engineer: One copy.
Authority having jurisdiction: One copy or as otherwise requested by the
Authority.
B.
Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and
responsibilities.
C.
Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.
D.
Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,
submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before
starting work on the following systems:
1.
Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the
designated seismic system.
01 40 00 - 3
Gensler
12.7468.005
2.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-forceresisting system.
E.
Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
F.
Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for
each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a
design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with
performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in
performing these services.
G.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
H.
Testing Agency and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that
include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
I.
Description of test and inspection.
Identification of applicable standards.
Identification of test and inspection methods.
Number of tests and inspections required.
Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
Requirements for obtaining samples.
Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports:
Prepare written information
documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.
Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
01 40 00 - 4
Gensler
12.7468.005
4.
5.
6.
7.
J.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.7
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting
manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1.
K.
30 April 2014
Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative
making report.
Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN
A.
Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within ten days of Notice to
Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format
acceptable to Owner. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and
forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities.
Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.
B.
Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and
experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures
similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.
1.
Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.
C.
Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through
review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible
for submittal review.
D.
Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work
requiring testing or inspection, including the following:
1.
2.
Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and
inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and
inspections.
Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the
"Statement of Special Inspections."
01 40 00 - 5
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents, including
tests and inspections indicated to be performed by the Commissioning Authority.
E.
Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during
construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and
inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into
compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved
mockups.
F.
Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of
approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or
defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with
requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced and expert in producing products similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a three-year record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
D.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a three-year record of successful in-service performance.
E.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a five-year record of successful in-service
performance.
F.
Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation
of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
G.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of the system, assembly, or products that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
H.
Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities
shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall
satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
01 40 00 - 6
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
I.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations
governing the Work, nor interfere with local trade-union jurisdictional settlements and
similar conventions.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP-accredited, or an independent agency
with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented
by ASTM E 329, and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities..
1.
2.
J.
30 April 2014
NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program.
Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing
for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the
following:
1.
Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
K.
Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed products and
construction.
Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies and mockups to adequately
demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.
Fabricate and install test assemblies and mockups using installers who will
perform the same tasks for Project.
When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do
not reuse products on Project.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,
inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect and Commissioning
Authority when applicable, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and
state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the
Contract Documents.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish specified in individual Sections, to comply with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers
that will be employed during the construction at Project.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
a.
Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
01 40 00 - 7
Gensler
12.7468.005
6.
7.
L.
2.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
Room Mockups: Construct room mockups incorporating required materials and assemblies,
finished according to requirements. Provide required lighting and additional lighting where
required to enable Architect to evaluate quality of the Work. Construct room mockups
according to design indicated on Drawings.
1.
2.
1.9
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup according to design
indicated on Drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for
which mockups are required in individual Specification Sections, along with supporting
materials.
1.
M.
30 April 2014
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are
engaged to perform.
Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as
authorized by Change Orders.
Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that
the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.
1.
2.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required
by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of
Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
a.
Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
01 40 00 - 8
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
Provide quality assurance and control services required due to changes in the Work
proposed by or made by the Contractor.
Provide quality control services for Work done contrary to the Contract Documents,
without prior notice, when so specified, or without proper supervision.
Overtime expenses and schedule delays accruing as a result of executing quality control
services shall be the Contactor's responsibility and shall not be charged to the Owner.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Services:
Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal
Procedures."
D.
Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical
representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's
services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and
conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed
portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
E.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established
by the Contract Documents. Architect retains the right to require the use of a different testing
agency for retesting ad reinspecting.
F.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Commissioning Authority and
Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and
inspections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
Notify Architect, Commissioning Authority when applicable, and Contractor promptly of
irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Attend Project progress meetings as requested by Owner.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
01 40 00 - 9
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
H.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and quality control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
I.
A.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar qualitycontrol services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's qualitycontrol plan. Coordinate and submit schedule concurrently with Contractor's Construction
Schedule as specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."
1.
1.10
Access to the Work.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples.
Delivery of samples to testing agencies or arranging for pick-up of test samples after
normal business hours.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Commissioning Authority when
applicable, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the
Work where tests and inspections are required.
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency or special
inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as
the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures
and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
Notifying Architect, Commissioning Authority when applicable, and Contractor promptly
of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Architect and Commissioning Authority when applicable, with copy to
Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,
which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
01 40 00 - 10
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A.
Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.2
Date test or inspection was conducted.
Description of the Work tested or inspected.
Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test
and inspection log for Architect's and Commissioning Authority's, reference during normal
working hours.
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched
areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible
as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section
"Cutting and Patching."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
01 40 00 - 11
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
USE CHARGES
A.
General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included
in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services
and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
1.3
Unless otherwise specified, pay all costs associated with the use, provision, and
maintenance of, temporary facilities and controls including power, water, sewer, and fuel
(if any) consumed until Substantial Completion.
Owner has designated space in the existing building for temporary facilities. Connect to
existing building utilities provide separate metering if requested by Owner.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and
NFPA 241.
1.
2.
Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary
utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions.
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
C.
Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and local
building code.
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Use of Permanent Utilities: When each permanent utility is operational, it may be used for
construction purposes, if acceptable, in writing, by the Owner. The written request for
permission for use of the system from the Owner shall include, as a minimum, the conditions
and reasons for use, provisions for, and effect on equipment warranties. In the event that the
Owner accepts the Contractor's use of the permanent utility for the balance of the Work, the
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 50 00 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Contractor shall be fully responsible for it, and shall pay all costs for operation, power,
restoration, and maintenance of same.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT
A.
HVAC Equipment: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use
during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and
remove at end of construction.
B.
Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with fourstage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.
C.
Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation or
combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar
nonabsorbent material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
B.
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION AND USE
A.
General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to
existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the
remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company
recommendations.
1.
2.
Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction.
B.
Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping before
use.
C.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,
number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
01 50 00 - 2
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
D.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are
cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion,
restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that
will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
1.
E.
30 April 2014
Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C) in permanently enclosed
portions of building for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F (18.3 deg C) for
finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed.
Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering
occupied areas.
1.
Prior to commencing Work, isolate the HVAC system in area where Work is to be
performed according to coordination drawings.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Disconnect supply and return ductwork in Work area from HVAC systems
servicing occupied areas.
Maintain negative air pressure within Work area using HEPA-equipped airfiltration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction,
and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete.
Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dustproducing equipment. Isolate limited Work within occupied areas using portable dustcontainment devices.
Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filterequipped vacuum equipment.
Provide for one entrance to be used for construction personnel and materials.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide adequate ventilation in enclosed areas throughout
construction period required to: facilitate progress of Work; to protect Work and products
against dampness and heat and cold; to prevent moisture condensation on surfaces; to provide
suitable ambient temperatures for installation and curing of finish materials; to provide adequate
ventilating; to meet health regulations for safe working environment; and, to prevent hazardous
accumulations of dusts, fumes, mists, vapors or gases in areas occupied during construction.
Provide local exhaust ventilating to prevent harmful dispersal of hazardous substances into
atmosphere of occupied areas. Dispose of exhaust materials in manner that will not result in
harmful exposure to persons or property. Provide ventilating operations at all times personnel
occupy an area, when subject to hazardous accumulations of harmful elements. Continue
operation of ventilating system for as long as required after cessation of Work to assure removal
of harmful elements.
1.
In the event that the Owner accepts the Contractor's use of the permanent ventilation and
air conditioning systems for the balance of the Work, provide and maintain temporary
filters to adequately filter air being distributed through the ductwork and air handling
units to the supply outlets; disposable filter shall be placed in front of all exhaust registers
to keep construction dirt out of exhaust ductwork.
01 50 00 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
G.
Electric Power and Lighting Service:
1.
Arrange with local electric utility for temporary electric service to the site. Provide all
installation and equipment for temporary lighting and power. The electrical service shall
be of adequate capacity for all construction tools and equipment without overloading the
temporary facilities.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
H.
2.
3.3
Provide power distribution throughout the site as required to facilitate construction
operations. Terminations shall be provided for each voltage supply complete with
circuit breakers, disconnect switches and other electrical devices as required to
protect the power supply system.
A temporary lighting system shall be furnished, installed and maintained by the
Contractor as required to satisfy the minimum requirements of security and safety.
Provide general illumination for the entire Project. Provide increased levels of
illumination where the Work is being installed.
All temporary equipment and wiring for power and lighting shall be in accordance with
the applicable provisions of the governing codes and regulations, the NEC, NEMA, UL,
and OSHA standards. Install temporary service to comply with NFPA 70.
Maintain temporary power and lighting to give safe working conditions, continuous
service, and so as not to pose a threat to the Owner's property.
Modify and extend temporary power and lighting systems as the Work progress requires.
Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period. Long
distance calls shall be paid for by the party making the call. A pay phone is not acceptable.
1.
I.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Provide superintendent with cellular telephone. A cellular phone is not acceptable as the
only phone on the Project.
Post numbers for emergency services, the Owner, the Architect, and other parties critical
to the work over all project telephones.
Internet Service: Provide computer with high-speed, broadband connection (examples:
Business Class DSL, Multiple T1, Metro Ethernet), including router, equipped with hardware
firewall; providing minimum 1Mbps upload and 1 Mbps download speeds for superintendent's
use in sending and receiving e-mail.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Project Signs: No Project identification signs or advertisements will be permitted on the Project
site. Provide warning signs as required to inform tenants, public, and construction personnel of
possible dangers.
B.
Construction Aids: Provide all items, such as lifting devices, all scaffolding, staging, platforms,
runways, ladders; and all temporary flooring, as required by the various trades for the proper
execution of the Work. Provide such construction aids with proper guys, bracing, guards,
railings and other safety devices as required by the governing authorities and OSHA.
01 50 00 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
3.4
A.
Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities,
finishes and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those
indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
B.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible
air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
C.
Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated
and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt
migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise. Where
fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having
jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies.
E.
Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241 and all applicable Federal, state and local codes and regulations; manage fireprevention program.
F.
Security: Provide and maintain provisions for closing and locking the site to prevent
unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
G.
Moisture-Protection: Avoid trapping water in finished Work. Document visible signs of mold
that may appear during construction. Prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems,
maintain as follows:
1.
2.
3.5
Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.
Comply with manufacturers' written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and
exposure to water limits.
TERMINATION AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.
2.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in
Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."
01 50 00 - 5
Gensler
12.7468.005
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
015000/02-10/pbb
01 50 00 - 6
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Product selection.
Product delivery, storage, and handling.
Product warranties.
Comparable products.
Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for contract closeout.
Divisions 03 through 28 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products
and installations specified to be warranted.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless
explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not
considered new products.
Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or
exceed those of specified product.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's
product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design" product, including make or
model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type,
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 60 00 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers
named in the specification.
C.
Low VOC Content Levels: Except as otherwise indicated or where more restricted in Divisions
03 through 28 Specifications Sections for limits of VOC contents in products and materials, the
following shall constitute the maximum levels of volatile organic compounds.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
1.4
Form Release Agents
Plastic Laminate Adhesive
Casework and Millwork Adhesives
Transparent Wood Finish Systems
Cast Resin Countertop silicone Sealant
Garage Deck Sealer
Water based Joint Sealants
Non-water based Joint Sealants
Portland Cement Plaster
Gypsum Drywall Joint Compound
Terrazzo Sealer
Acoustic Panel Ceiling Finish
Resilient Tile Flooring Adhesive
Vinyl Flooring Adhesives
Carpet Adhesive
Carpet Seam Sealer
Water-based Paint & Polychromatic finish coatings
Solvent -based Paint
High Performance Water-Based Acrylic coatings
Pigmented Acrylic Sealers
Catalyzed Epoxy coatings
High Performance Silicone
Casework Sealant
Liquid membrane-forming curing & sealing compound
350 g/L VOC content
20 g/L VOC content
20 g/L VOC content
350 g/L VOC content
20 g/L VOC content
600 g/L VOC content
50 g/L VOC content
350 g/L VOC content
20 g/L VOC content
20 g/L VOC content
250 g/L VOC content
50 g/L VOC content
100 g/L VOC content
100 g/L VOC content
50 g/L VOC content
50 g/L VOC content
150 g/L VOC content
380 g/L VOC content
250 g/L VOC content
250 g/L VOC content
250 g/L VOC content
250 g/L VOC content
50 g/L VOC content
350 g/L VOC content
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names
of products required. Include manufacturer's name, installer's name and proprietary product
names for each product.
1.
2.
Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals
Schedule.
Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Generic name used in the Contract Documents.
Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.
Manufacturer's name and address.
Supplier's name and address.
Installer's name and address.
Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period.
01 60 00 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
g.
3.
4.
B.
Completed List: Within 30 days after Owner's Authorization to proceed with
construction, submit 3 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for
omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements.
Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of
receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable
product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response,
or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply
with the Contract Documents.
Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.
Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification
Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
2.
Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable
Products" Article.
Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product
request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable
product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional
information or documentation, whichever is later.
a.
b.
C.
1.5
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery
date.
Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."
Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300
"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Delivery and Handling:
1.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
01 60 00 - 3
Gensler
12.7468.005
2.
3.
4.
C.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Storage:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.7
30 April 2014
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1.
2.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
specific rights for Owner.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using indicated form properly executed.
Refer to Divisions 03 through 28 Sections for specific content requirements and
particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
01 60 00 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.
Product Selection Procedures:
1.
2.
3.
Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions
for Contractor's convenience will not be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
considered, unless otherwise indicated.
Products:
a.
b.
4.
Restricted List:
Where Specifications include a list of names of both
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will not be considered unless otherwise indicated.
Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed
product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will not be considered unless otherwise indicated.
Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed
manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
01 60 00 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
5.
6.
C.
2.2
Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product
indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics
that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable
Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named
manufacturers.
Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs titled "Product Options" indicate that
size, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product
or system, provide either the specific product or system indicated or a comparable
product or system by another manufacturer. Comply with requirements in Section
01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.
Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample",
provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's
decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1.
D.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's
product.
If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution
Procedures" for proposal of product.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with
requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that includes both standard and premium items.
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable
product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not
satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
these requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents,
that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results,
and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
Samples, if requested.
01 60 00 - 6
Gensler
12.7468.005
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
01 60 00 - 7
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 01 73 00 − EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
Construction layout.
General installation of the Work.
Coordination of Owner-installed products.
Progress cleaning.
Starting and adjusting.
Protection of installed construction.
Repair of the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written
recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground utilities, site improvements,
and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework,
investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, site improvements,
mechanical and electrical systems, existing construction and other services affecting the Work.
EXECUTION
01 73 00 - 1
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
2.
B.
2.
3.
3.2
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the
Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, water-service piping, underground electrical services, and
other utilities.
Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.
1.
C.
30 April 2014
Description of the Work.
List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
Recommended corrections.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner for issue to local utility that is
necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or
other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
C.
Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
EXECUTION
01 73 00 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
D.
E.
3.3
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Space Requirements:
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control
of Contractor, submit a request for interpretation to Architect according to Section 01 26 13
"Request for Interpretation." Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together
with recommendations for necessary modifications that may be required.
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to existing benchmarks, control and reference points. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B.
General: Lay out the Work using accepted practices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels as needed to locate each
element of the Project.
Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
C.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, architectural elements, including those required for
mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control
lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
D.
Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Make the log available for reference by Architect.
3.4
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
Maintain minimum headroom clearances indicated.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
EXECUTION
01 73 00 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
C.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction
items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produces harmful noise levels.
G.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
H.
Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size
and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with
other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size
and type required for load conditions
1.
2.
3.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
I.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
K.
Protect adjacent property and adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or
blow-over of coatings, paints, sprayed fire-resistive material, and other spray-applied products.
Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces, including live plants and grass, if there is possibility of
spray-applied products being deposited on surfaces.
3.5
OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A.
Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by
Owner's construction forces.
1.
Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule
for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually
EXECUTION
01 73 00 - 4
Gensler
12.7468.005
2.
3.6
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences
in actual construction progress.
Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation
conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend
preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the
Work depend on Owner's construction.
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
2.
3.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 degrees F.
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1.
2.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from
damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed.
Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
1.
H.
Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other
finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing
waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
EXECUTION
01 73 00 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
I.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
J.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
K.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.7
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in
Section 01 91 13 "General Commissioning Requirements."
B.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation.
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
C.
Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for
proper operation.
D.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
E.
Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification
requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" and additional requirements specified
in Division 3 thru Division 49 Specification Sections.
3.8
Remove
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.9
REPAIR OF THE WORK
A.
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective
parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
adjusting operating equipment.
1.
2.
Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements.
Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating
components that cannot be repaired.
EXECUTION
01 73 00 - 6
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.
4.
5.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to
specified condition.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other
damaged transparent materials.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a.
6.
7.
Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and
identification.
Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and
noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for
new fixtures.
EXECUTION
01 73 00 - 7
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Divisions 3 through 28 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to
Divisions 21 through 28 for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and
patching mechanical and electrical installations.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cutting: Removal of in-place or existing construction necessary to permit installation or
performance of other Work.
B.
Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after
installation of other Work.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection. Shore, brace, and support structural
elements during cutting and patching.
B.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Primary operational systems and equipment.
Primary air and water distribution systems and equipment.
Air or smoke barriers.
Fire-protection systems.
Control systems.
Communication systems.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
01 73 29 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
7.
8.
C.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Conveying systems.
Electrical wiring systems.
Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in
a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity
to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
Membranes and flashings.
Exterior wall elements.
Sprayed-fire-resistive material.
Equipment supports.
Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.
D.
Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that
would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace
construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
E.
Existing Warranties: Do not cut and patch in-place or existing construction by methods or in
any manner that may void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PATCHING MATERIALS
A.
New Materials: Comply with requirements specified in Division 3 through 28 Sections of these
Specifications.
B.
In-Place or Existing Materials: Use materials identical to in-place or existing materials. For
exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place or existing adjacent surfaces to the
fullest extent possible and that are approved by Architect.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of
in-place or existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
01 73 29 - 2
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
2.
3.2
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B.
Protection: Protect in-place or existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent
damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might
be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C.
Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
D.
Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or
abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied
areas.
1.
3.3
All temporary bypass utilities must be reviewed and approved, in writing, by Owner prior
to placing in service.
PERFORMANCE
A.
General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
B.
Cut in-place or existing construction to provide for installation of other components or
performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces
to their original condition.
Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
01 73 29 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
C.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections of these Specifications.
1.
2.
3.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence
of patching and refinishing.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place or existing
floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform
color and appearance.
a.
4.
5.
D.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and
intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final
paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional
coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place or existing ceilings as necessary to provide an
even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
END OF SECTION 017329
01 73 29 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 01 74 19 — CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes requirements for waste reduction and for the recycling of non-hazardous,
recyclable, construction and demolition debris.
1.
2.
1.3
Reduce waste by minimizing factors that contribute to waste.
Use reasonable and legal means to divert construction and demolition debris from
landfills and incinerators by facilitating their recycling or reuse through a Contractor
developed, and Owner reviewed, construction waste management program.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Waste Reduction: Construction practices that achieve the most efficient use of resources and
materials; uses water efficiently; avoids practices such as over-packaging, improper storage,
ordering errors, poor planning, breakage, mishandling and contamination.
B.
Construction and Demolition Debris: Solid wastes arising from demolition or removal, excess
or unusable construction materials, packing materials for construction products, and other
materials generated on site during the construction process but not incorporated into the Work.
C.
Recyclable Materials: Construction and demolition debris that can be recovered and processed
into new products or materials. Recyclable materials include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Metals: Ferrous (iron, steel, stainless steel, galvanized steel) and non-ferrous (copper,
brass, bronze, aluminum) types and containers made from metals such as pails, buckets
and beverage cans.
Concrete.
Gypsum wallboard.
Paper products such as generated from field office activities and clean corrugated
packaging cardboard.
Wood products, including untreated dimensional lumber, plywood, oriented strand board,
hardboard, particleboard and crates and pallets made from wood products.
Brick and stone masonry.
Carpet and padding.
Plastics and containers made from plastics such as pails, buckets, and beverage bottles.
Copper wiring.
Glass: Glass beverage containers, window and mirror glass.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
01 74 19 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
D.
E.
1.4
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Non-Recyclable Materials: Construction and demolition debris not capable of being reused or
reprocessed, exclusive of the recyclable materials listed above.
Hazardous Materials: Construction and demolition debris that are regulated for disposal by
local, city, county, state, or Federal authorities.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Construction Waste Management Program: Submit the proposed waste management program
appended to the bid. The program shall include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Identification of Contractor's staff responsible for enforcing construction waste
management.
Actions that will be taken to reduce solid waste generation.
Description of the specific methods to be used in recycling/reuse of the various
construction and demolition debris generated, including the areas and equipment to be
used for processing, sorting, and temporary storage of debris.
Characterization, including estimated types and quantities of the construction and
demolition debris to be generated. Include percentages of recyclable and non-recyclable
debris.
List of specific construction and demolition debris materials that will be salvaged for
resale, salvaged and reused, or recycled.
Name(s) of landfill and incinerator to be used and the estimated costs for use, for
construction and demolition debris that is unable to be recycled or reused.
Identification of local and regional reuse programs, including non-profit organizations
such as schools, local housing agencies, and organizations that accept used and excess
construction materials such as materials exchange networks and Habitat for Humanity.
Identification of local recycling facilities that will accept construction and demolition
debris.
Identification of construction and demolition debris that cannot be recycled/reused with
an explanation or justification.
Anticipated net cost savings determined by subtracting (1) Contractor program
management costs and the cost of disposal from (2) the revenue generated by sale of the
construction and demolition debris and avoided landfill and incineration costs.
Waste Management Reports: With each Application for Payment submit a Waste Management
Report in a form acceptable to the Architect and Owner. Attach manifests, weight tickets,
receipts and invoices. Organize and maintain records to document the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Quantity of debris generated, for each material recycled, reused or salvaged.
Quantity of debris diverted through sale, reuse, or recycling, in tons or cubic yards.
Quantity of debris disposed by landfill or incineration.
Name and location of each firm accepting the debris, including:
a.
b.
c.
5.
6.
7.
Types of debris accepted.
Net weights of each type.
Date of acceptance.
Transportation cost for removal of debris from job site.
Amount of money paid or received for the recycled, reused or salvaged materials.
Net total cost or savings of recycling, reusing or salvaging materials.
01 74 19 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
C.
1.5
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Project Closeout: Upon project completion submit the Waste Management Records to the
Owner.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Construction Waste Management: Prior to bid, prepare a program that minimizes waste and
diverts construction and demolition debris from landfills and incinerators by facilitating their
reuse or recycling. Name the waste material processors who will accept the construction and
demolition debris, the condition of the construction and demolition debris required by the waste
material processors, the method proposed to provide the construction and demolition debris in
suitable condition and in a quantity acceptable to the disposal sites and waste material
processors whom will receive them, and the impact on the project schedule. The Contractor
shall be responsible for implementation of any special programs involving rebates or similar
incentives related to the recycling of waste. Revenues or other savings obtained from sale,
reuse, and recycling operations shall accrue to the Contractor.
B.
Disposal Sites and Waste Material Processors: Use only facilities with valid legal permits for
disposal, recycling and waste processing issued by the jurisdictions in which they are located.
C.
Pre-Construction Waste Management Meeting: Prior to beginning site preparation, schedule
and conduct a meeting to review the Waste Management Program. The meeting shall include
the Contractor, the Architect, the Owner and any of the Contractor's subcontractors or suppliers
whose work will interface with the program. The agenda shall include a discussion of
procedures, schedules and specific requirements for construction and demolition debris, sale,
reuse, recycling, and disposal. Make any revisions to the program that are agreed to as a part of
the meeting and submit the revised program and the meeting minutes to the Architect and
Owner for their records.
1.6
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Develop waste management plan that results in end-of-Project rates for
salvage/recycling of 95 percent by weight of total waste generated by the Work.
B.
Salvage/Recycle Requirements: Owner's goal is to salvage and recycle as much non-hazardous
demolition and construction waste as possible including the following materials:
1.
Demolition Waste:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
Asphalted concrete paving.
Concrete.
Concrete reinforcing steel.
Structural and miscellaneous steel.
Rough hardware.
Roofing.
Insulation.
Doors and frames.
Door hardware.
Aluminum Curtainwall Framing.
Glazing.
Metal studs.
01 74 19 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
z.
aa.
bb.
cc.
dd.
ee.
ff.
gg.
hh.
2.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Gypsum board.
Acoustical tile and panels.
Carpet.
Carpet pad.
Demountable partitions.
Equipment.
Cabinets.
Plumbing fixtures.
Piping.
Supports and hangers.
Valves.
Sprinklers.
Mechanical equipment.
Refrigerants.
Electrical conduit.
Copper wiring.
Lighting fixtures.
Lamps.
Ballasts.
Electrical devices.
Switchgear and panel boards.
Transformers.
Construction Waste:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
Site-clearing waste.
Masonry and CMU.
Lumber.
Wood sheet materials.
Wood trim.
Metals.
Roofing.
Insulation.
Carpet and pad.
Ceramic and terrazzo tile.
Gypsum board.
Piping.
Electrical conduit.
Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated above, salvage or recycle
100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Paper.
Cardboard.
Boxes.
Plastic sheet and film.
Polystyrene packaging.
Wood crates.
Plastic pails.
01 74 19 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.7
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A.
General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and
cost/revenue analysis. Include separate sections in plan for demolition and construction waste.
Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste
management plan.
B.
Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition, site-clearing and
construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for
estimates.
C.
Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled,
or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of
each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation
procedures.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this
Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the
Work.
Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and
organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and
organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled
materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include
name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.
Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating
recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location
on Project site where materials separation will be located.
Recycled and Salvaged Materials by Trade: Include list of materials by trade that will be
recycled or salvaged during the course of construction by each of the construction trades
on the job.
Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste
management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste
management plan. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Total quantity of waste.
Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of
collection containers for each type of waste.
Total cost of disposal (with no waste management).
Revenue from salvaged materials.
Revenue from recycled materials.
Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials.
Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided.
Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of
waste.
Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.
01 74 19 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WASTE MANAGEMENT PROGRAM IMPLEMENTATION
A.
Distribution: The Contractor shall distribute copies of the Construction Waste Management
Program to the Job Site Foreman, each Subcontractor, the Owner and the Architect.
B.
General: For the duration of the project, implement and maintain construction waste
management. During the prosecution of the Work encourage the practice of efficient waste
reduction when sizing, cutting, and installing products and materials.
C.
Transportation: Arrange for the regular collection, transport from the site, and delivery of the
construction wastes and debris to the designated recyclers, and waste material processors and
disposal sites.
D.
Separation Facilities: The Contractor shall provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation,
handling separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse and return methods to be used by
all parties at the appropriate stages of the Project. Provide and designate an on-site area for the
separation of construction and demolition debris for reuse and recycling. Locate the area in
order that non-recyclable debris will not contaminate materials to be reused or recycled.
Provide containers and bins in the designated area to facilitate separation, storage and handling
which are clearly and appropriately marked. Cut all items to lengths and sizes to fit within the
containers or bins provided. Where there is sufficient quantity of a specific recyclable debris
item (for example; salvaged metal doors and frames or duct work), make arrangements for
items to be bundled, banded or tied, and stack in a designated location for a special pick-up.
Maintain the separation facilities in an orderly condition to prevent contamination of materials
placed therein and to maximize reuse and recyclability of debris. Separate construction and
demolition debris at the project site by one of the following methods:
1.
2.
Source Separated Method: Construction and demolition debris, that is reusable and
recyclable, are separated from non-recyclable debris and sorted into appropriately marked
separated containers or bins and then transported to the designated recycling facility for
further processing. Non-recyclable debris is transported to a landfill or incinerator.
Co-Mingled Method: All construction and demolition debris is placed into containers or
bins and then transported to a recycling facility where recyclable and salvageable
materials are removed, sorted, and processed and the remaining waste is transported to a
landfill or incinerator.
E.
General: Implement waste management plan and provide handling, containers, storage,
signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan
during the entire duration of the Contract.
F.
Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible
for preparing, implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan.
Coordinator shall be engaged for duration of Project and shall be present at Project site at least
one day per week whenever construction operations are underway.
G.
01 74 19 - 6
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Substantial Completion procedures.
Final completion procedures.
Warranties.
Final cleaning.
Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.
Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
B.
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
C.
Field Report: For pest control inspection.
1.5
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and
corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why
the Work is incomplete.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 00 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
B.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of ten days
prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of ten days
prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
D.
Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction
permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.
Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project
record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction
photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar
final record information.
Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,
workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar
documents.
Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools,
spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
Submit pest-control final inspection report.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency
responders.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
Complete repair and restoration operations.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a
minimum of ten days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and
tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor
of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion
after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items
identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 00 - 2
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
2.
E.
1.6
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
Certificate Form: AIA Document G704, Certificate of Substantial Completion.
FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final
completion, complete the following:
1.
2.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of
ten days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On
receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection
or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate
will be issued.
1.
1.7
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed
and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A.
Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
2.
3.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and
proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
Include the following information at the top of each page:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
Project name.
Date.
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
Page number.
Submit list of incomplete items in one of the following electronic formats:
a.
MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 00 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
b.
5.
1.8
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.
Additional copies: In addition to submission of electronic files, submit three paper
copies.
SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A.
Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.
B.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project
Manual.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
1.
Use cleaning products that comply with applicable State VOC restrictions.
PART 3 - PRODUCTS
3.1 EXECUTION
A.
General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 00 - 4
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean
according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 00 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,
including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.
1.3
Record Drawings.
Record Specifications.
Record Product Data.
Miscellaneous record submittals.
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Record Drawings: Submit one set of marked-up record prints.
B.
Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda
and contract modifications.
C.
Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal.
1.
D.
Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,
submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous recordkeeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit
one paper copy of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01 78 39 - 1
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide
information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic
documentation, if any.
Dimensional changes to Drawings.
Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
Depths of foundations below first floor.
Locations and depths of underground utilities.
Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
Revisions to electrical circuitry.
Actual equipment locations.
Duct size and routing.
Locations of concealed internal utilities.
Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
Changes made following Architect's written orders.
Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately and cross
reference Shop Drawings to Contract Drawings. Use personnel proficient at recording
graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
Note alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, Construction Change Directive
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record
Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop
Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.
1.
2.
New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting
an alternate, substitution, or other modification.
Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record
the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly
prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for
formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.
01 78 39 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
C.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1.
2.
Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
on cover sheets.
Identification: As follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.2
Project name.
Date.
Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.3
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.
Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.
Format: Maintain format of original Project Manual organized sequentially by Specification
Section number and title.
RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A.
Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where
applicable.
Format: Include record Product Data directory organized sequentially by Specification Section
number and title.
01 78 39 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
2.4
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A.
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. Miscellaneous
record submittals include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Certificates.
Reports.
Inspection data.
Test results.
Design data.
Engineering analysis.
Informational submittals.
Format:
Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized sequentially by
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A.
Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project
record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they
occur; do not wait until end of Project.
B.
Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record
documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,
dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record
documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
01 78 39 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 01 81 19 – INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) MANAGEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Special requirements for Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) management during construction
operations.
a.
b.
2.
B.
1.3
Control of emissions during construction.
Moisture control during construction.
Procedures for testing baseline IAQ. Baseline IAQ requirements specify maximum
indoor pollutant concentrations for acceptance of the facility.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for cleaning of
HVAC system including ductwork, air intakes and returns, and changing of filters.
REFERENCES
A.
Definitions: Definitions pertaining to sustainable development: As defined in ASTM E 2114.
1.
2.
Adequate Ventilation: Ventilation, including air circulation and air changes, required to
cure materials, dissipate humidity, and prevent accumulation of particulates, dust, fumes,
vapors, or gases.
Hazardous Materials: Any material that is regulated as a hazardous material in
accordance with 49 CFR 173, requires a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) in
accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1200, or which during end use, treatment, handling,
storage, transportation or disposal meets or has components which meet or have the
potential to meet the definition of a Hazardous Waste in accordance with 40 CFR 261.
a.
3.
Hazardous materials include: pesticides, biocides, and carcinogens as listed by
recognized authorities, such as the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and
the International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC).
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ): The composition and characteristics of the air in an enclosed
space that affect the occupants of that space. The indoor air quality of a space refers to
the relative quality of air in a building with respect to contaminants and hazards and is
INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) MANAGEMENT
01 81 19 - 1
Gensler
12.7468.005
4.
5.
6.
1.4
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
determined by the level of indoor air pollution and other characteristics of the air,
including those that impact thermal comfort such as air temperature, relative humidity
and air speed.
Interior Final Finishes: Materials and products that will be exposed at interior, occupied
spaces; including flooring, wallcovering, finish carpentry, ceilings, and sealants.
Packaged Dry Products: Materials and products that are installed in dry form and are
delivered to the site in manufacturer's packaging; including carpets, resilient flooring,
ceiling tiles, and insulation.
Wet Products: Materials and products installed in wet form, including paints, sealants,
adhesives, special coatings, and other materials which require curing.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.5
Preconstruction Conference: After award of Contract and prior to the commencement of the
Work, schedule and conduct meeting with Owner and Architect to discuss the proposed IAQ
Management Plan and to develop mutual understanding relative to details of environmental
protection.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan: Not less than 10 days before the preconstruction
conference, prepare and submit an IAQ Management Plan including, but not limited to, the
following:
1.
Procedures for control of emissions during construction.
a.
2.
Procedures for moisture control during construction.
a.
b.
3.
Identify porous materials and absorptive materials.
Identify schedule for inspection of stored and installed absorptive materials.
Revise and resubmit Plan as required by Architect.
a.
B.
Identify schedule for application of interior finishes.
Approval of Contractor's Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with applicable environmental regulations.
Product Data:
1.
2.
3.
Submit product data for filtration media used during construction and during operation.
Include Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV).
Submit air pressure difference maps for each mode of operation of HVAC.
Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit MSDSs for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance
Manual for the following products.
a.
b.
c.
Adhesives.
Floor and wall patching/leveling materials.
Caulking and sealants.
01 81 19 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
C.
Insulating materials.
Fireproofing and firestopping.
Carpet.
Paint.
Clear finish for wood surfaces.
Lubricants.
Cleaning products.
Inspection and Test Reports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.6
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Moisture control inspections.
Moisture content testing.
Moisture penetration testing.
Microbial growth testing.
Baseline Indoor Air Quality test report.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years experience in performing the types of
testing specified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES
A.
Mold and Mildew: Materials that have evidence of growth of molds or mildew are not
acceptable, including both stored and installed materials. Immediately remove from site and
dispose of properly.
B.
Moisture Stains: Materials that have evidence of moisture damage, including stains, are not
acceptable, including both stored and installed materials. Immediately remove from site and
dispose of properly.
2.2
AIR FILTRATION MEDIA
A.
Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) as determined by ASHRAE 52.2:
1.
2.
2.3
MERV-8 for filtration media used at each return air grill, if used during construction.
MERV-13, for filtration media installed at the end of construction and prior to
occupancy.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
A.
Use low-toxic and lowest-emitting spot removers and cleaning agents for surfaces, equipment,
and workers' personal use.
B.
Use HEPA-filter equipped vacuum cleaners for the final cleaning.
01 81 19 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
IAQ MANAGEMENT - EMISSIONS CONTROL
A.
HVAC Protection:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Seal return registers during construction operations.
Provide temporary exhaust during construction operations
To the greatest extent possible, isolate and/or shut down the return side of the HVAC
system during construction. When ventilation system must be operational during
construction activities, provide temporary filters.
Source Control:
1.
2.
Provide low and zero VOC materials as specified.
Do not use products in combination with or in contact with other products that can be
identified as combining to form toxic fumes or sustained odors.
C.
Pathway Interruption: Isolate areas of work as necessary to prevent contamination of clean or
occupied spaces. Provide pressure differentials and/or physical barriers to protect clean or
occupied spaces.
D.
Housekeeping: During construction, maintain project and building products and systems to
prevent contamination of building spaces.
E.
Temporary Ventilation: Provide an ACH (air changes per hour) of 1.5 or more and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Provide minimum 48-hour pre-ventilation of packaged dry products prior to installation.
Remove from packaging and ventilate in a secure, dry, well-ventilated space free from
strong contaminant sources and residues. Provide a temperature range of 60 degrees F
minimum to 90 degrees F maximum continuously during the ventilation period. Do not
ventilate within limits of Work unless otherwise approved by Architect.
Provide adequate ventilation during and after installation of interior wet products and
interior final finishes.
Provide filtration media with a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 8 as
determined by ASHRAE 52.2 during construction. Coordinate with Work of Division
23, Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC).
a.
F.
Replace filters during construction as necessary to protect equipment and indoor
air quality.
Scheduling: Schedule construction operations involving wet products prior to packaged dry
products to the greatest extent possible.
1.
Do not use solvents within interior areas that may penetrate and be retained in absorptive
materials such as concrete, gypsum board, wood, cellulose products, fibrous material, and
textiles.
01 81 19 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
G.
H.
3.2
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Inspect ductwork for refuse, contaminants, moisture, and other foreign contamination prior to
commissioning by Owner. Notify Owner of satisfactory inspection prior to beginning of
commissioning.
Clean underfloor plenum at access flooring acting as supply air duct, prior to occupancy.
IAQ MANAGEMENT - MOISTURE CONTROL
A.
Housekeeping:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Keep materials dry. Protect stored on-site and installed absorptive materials from
moisture damage.
Verify that installed materials and products are dry prior to sealing and weatherproofing
the building envelope.
Install interior absorptive materials only after building envelope is sealed and
weatherproofed.
Inspections: Document and report results of inspections; state whether or not inspections
indicate satisfactory conditions.
1.
2.
3.
Examine materials for dampness as they arrive. If acceptable to Architect, dry damp
materials completely prior to installation; otherwise, reject materials that arrive damp.
Examine materials for mold as they arrive and reject materials that arrive contaminated
with mold.
Inspect stored and installed absorptive materials regularly for dampness and mold
growth. Inspect weekly and after each rain event, if exposed to exterior elements.
a.
4.
5.
6.
Basement: Monitor basement and crawlspace humidity, and dehumidify when relative
humidity is greater than 85 percent for more than two weeks, or at the first sign of mold
growth.
Site Drainage: Verify that final grades of site work and landscaping drain surface water
and ground water away from the building.
Weatherproofing: Inspect moisture control materials as they are being installed. Include
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
7.
8.
Where stored on-site or installed absorptive materials become wet, notify
Architect. Inspect for damage. If acceptable to Architect, dry completely prior to
closing in assemblies; otherwise, remove and replace with new materials.
Air Barrier: Verify air barrier is installed without punctures and/or other damage.
Verify air barrier is sealed completely.
Flashing: Verify correct shingling of the flashing for roof, walls, windows, doors,
and other penetrations.
Insulation Layer: Verify insulation is installed without voids.
Roofing: In accordance with ASTM D 7186.
Plumbing: Verify satisfactory pressure test of pipes and drains is performed before
closing in and insulating lines.
HVAC:
Inspect HVAC system as specified in MEP Enginneer’s "General
Commissioning" section and inspect HVAC to verify:
01 81 19 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Schedule:
1.
2.
D.
Schedule work such that absorptive materials, including but not limited to porous
insulations, paper-faced gypsum board, ceiling tile, and finish flooring, are not installed
until they can be protected from rain and construction-related water.
Weatherproof as quickly as possible. Schedule installation of moisture-control materials,
including but not limited to air barriers, flashing, exterior sealants and roofing, at the
earliest possible time.
Testing for Moisture Content: Test moisture content of porous materials and absorptive
materials to ensure that they are dry before sealing them into an assembly. Document and
report results of testing. Where tests are not satisfactory, dry materials and retest. If
satisfactory results cannot be obtained with retest, remove and replace with new materials.
1.
Concrete: Moisture test prior to finish flooring application as specified in Division 09,
and if not indicated, moisture test as per one or more of the following; unless otherwise
indicated, acceptable upper limits for concrete are less than 4 percent top inch; less than
85 percent headspace RH; less than 3 lbs/1000 sq. ft./day:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
condensate pans are sloped and plumbed correctly;
access panels are installed to allow for inspection and cleaning of coils and
ductwork downstream of coils;
ductwork and return plenums are air sealed;
duct insulation is installed and sealed; and
chilled water line and refrigerant line insulation are installed and sealed.
ASTM D 4263 - Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic
Sheet Method.
ASTM F 1869 - Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of
Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.
ASTM F 2170 - Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete
Floor Slabs Using In Situ Probes.
Wood: Moisture test as per ASTM D 4444 - Standard Test Methods for Use and
Calibration of Hand-Held Moisture Meters; unless otherwise indicated, acceptable upper
limits for wood products are less than 20 percent at center of piece; less than 15 percent
at surface.
Gypsum Board, Gypsum Plaster, Insulation, and Other Absorptive Materials: Moisture
test with a Pinless Moisture Meter to assess patterns of moisture, if any.
Water Leakage: Review as per ASTM E 2128 - Standard Guide for Evaluating Water
Leakage of Building Walls.
Testing for Support of Microbial Growth: Test and report in accordance with ASTM D 6329 Standard Guide for Developing Methodology for Evaluating the Ability of Indoor Materials to
Support Microbial Growth Using Static Environmental Chambers. Indicate susceptibility of
product or material to colonization and amplification of microorganisms.
Identify
microorganisms and conditions of testing.
1.
Normal Conditions: Perform testing at 35 degrees C and 50 percent relative humidity.
01 81 19 - 6
Gensler
12.7468.005
2.
3.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Extreme Conditions: Perform worst-case scenarios screening tests by providing an
atmosphere where environmental conditions may be favorable for microbial growth.
Perform testing for the following:
a.
b.
c.
3.3
Fireproofing material on appropriate substrate.
Acoustical ceilings.
Wallcovering.
BASELINE INDOOR AIR QUALITY TESTING
A.
After construction ends and prior to occupancy, conduct a baseline indoor air quality testing
procedure that randomly selects sampling points for every 25,000 sq. ft., or for each contiguous
floor area, whichever is larger, to measure the maximum concentration levels for the chemical
contaminates below:
1.
Carbon Dioxide (CO2): Maximum concentration of 530 parts per million per ASHRAE
62.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
3.4
This measurement is required only if the building is regularly occupied during the
testing. Measured differential between indoor and outdoor conditions is based on
occupancy type as defined by ASHRAE 62. Maximum concentration differential
in parts per million = 10,300/ventilation rate per occupant, in cubic feet per
minute, assuming an occupancy of 7 persons per 1000 sq. ft. of floor space.
Formaldehyde: 50 parts per billion per State of Washington IAQ Standard.
Particulates: 150 micrograms per cubic meter per EPA National Ambient Air Quality
Standard.
TVOC: 500 micrograms per cubic meter per State of Washington IAQ Standard.
4-PCH: 6.5 micrograms per cubic meter per State of Washington IAQ Standard.
For each building area where the maximum concentration limits are exceeded, conduct a partial
building flushout, for a maximum of two weeks, then retest the indoor air quality levels to
indicate the requirements are achieved.
IAQ MANAGEMENT – INDOOR CHEMICAL AND POLLUTANT SOURCE CONTROL
A.
General: Minimize building occupant exposure to potentially hazardous particulates, biological
contaminants, and chemical pollutants that degrade air and water quality.
B.
Exhaust Air: Sufficiently exhaust each space where hazardous gases or chemicals may be
present or used to create negative pressure with respect to adjacent spaces when doors to the
room are closed.
1.
2.
For each of these spaces, provide permanent construction or use temporary facilities for
self-closing doors, deck-to-deck partitions, and ceiling assemblies.
Exhaust rate: Provide minimum 0.50 cubic feet per minute (CFM) per square foot, with
no air recirculation. The pressure differential with surrounding spaces shall be a
minimum 5 Pascals (Pa) (0.02 inches of water gauge) on average and 1 Pa (0.004 inches
of water) at a minimum when doors to the rooms are closed.
01 81 19 - 7
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
C.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Filtration Media: Install new filtration media in all regularly occupied areas prior to occupancy.
1.
2.
D.
Minimum efficiency reporting value: MERV-13 or better.
Filtration shall be applied to process both return and outside air that is delivered as supply
air.
Containment Drains: Provide containment drains plumbed for appropriate disposal of
hazardous liquid wastes in spaces where water and chemical concentrate mixing occurs for
maintenance or laboratory purposes.
01 81 19 - 8
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy
requirements, and phasing requirements.
Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent
damage, and deliver to Owner.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall
where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and
that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled.
1.4
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
B.
Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones
and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to
Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.
1.
Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 41 19 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.5
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
A.
Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.
B.
Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures
proposed for protecting individuals and property , for dust control and , for noise control.
Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.
C.
Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending
dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's and other tenants' on-site
operations are uninterrupted.
Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
Use of elevator and stairs.
Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of
Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
D.
Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start
of demolition.
E.
Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.
F.
Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for
recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that
recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician
and date refrigerant was recovered.
G.
Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after completion
of selective demolition.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
B.
Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility
licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.8
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification
program.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
02 41 19 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
B.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
C.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
D.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1.
2.
Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate
contract.
E.
Historic Areas: Demolition and hauling equipment and other materials shall be of sizes that
clear surfaces within historic spaces, areas, rooms, and openings, including temporary
protection, by 12 inches (300 mm) or more.
F.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
G.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1.
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.
B.
Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not
guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.
C.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
02 41 19 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
D.
E.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building to
determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned
collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition
operations.
1.
2.
3.2
Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective
demolition activities.
Steel Tendons: Locate tensioned steel tendons and include recommendations for detensioning.
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A.
Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
protect them against damage.
1.
B.
Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in
Section 011000 "Summary."
Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems
serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1.
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
3.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
C.
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and
cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same
or compatible piping material.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished
according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
02 41 19 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.3
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
PREPARATION
1.
B.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and
to and from occupied portions of building.
Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of
existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage
and damage to structure and interior areas.
Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are
exposed during selective demolition operations.
Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling
specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required
to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes
to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
1.
3.4
Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable firesuppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
02 41 19 - 5
Gensler
12.7468.005
7.
8.
9.
B.
3.5
Clean salvaged items.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Building Structure and Shell: 75 percent.
Nonshell Elements: 50 percent.
Removed and Salvaged Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in
Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for
reuse of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is
indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval.
1.
2.
C.
30 April 2014
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A.
Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to
remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw
cuts.
B.
Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
C.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and
remove.
02 41 19 - 6
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
D.
3.6
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to
recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor
Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers.
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project
site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that
will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste
Management and Disposal."
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.7
CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
02 41 19 - 7
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 03 54 16 − HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling underlayment for interior finish
flooring.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans indicating substrates, locations, and average depths of
underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions.
1.3
A.
1.4
Field Test Results: Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements to determine compliance
with specified tolerances.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of
underlayment products required for this Project.
B.
Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certify in
writing that products are compatible.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from
moisture or other detrimental effects.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate
temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting
underlayment performance.
1.
Place hydraulic-cement-based underlayments only when ambient temperature and
temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F (10 and 27 deg C).
HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
03 54 16 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.7
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor-covering products and
adhesives, to ensure compatibility of products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT
A.
Underlayment: Hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/4 inch (6 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to
match adjacent floor elevations.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
Ardex, Inc.; K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete.
BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Chemrex Self-Leveling Underlayment.
b.
c.
Euclid Chemical Company (The); TAMMS SLU.
d.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Levelex Underlayment.
e.
Mapei Corporation; Ultraplan 1 Plus.
f.
Maxxon Corporation; Level-Right.
g.
United States Gypsum Company; Levelrock 4500.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic
cement as defined by ASTM C 219.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (28 MPa) at 28 days when tested
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer,
formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm); or coarse sand as
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
1.
Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for
underlayment thickness required.
C.
Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F (21 deg C).
D.
Reinforcement: For underlayment applied to wood substrates, provide galvanized metal lath or
other corrosion-resistant reinforcement recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.
E.
Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate,
conditions, and application indicated.
1.
F.
Primer shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for
metal substrates.
03 54 16 - 2
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Coating shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance.
1.
3.2
Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and
other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.
1.
C.
Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to
prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.
Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.
Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed
with installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission
rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/100 sq. m) in 24 hours.
Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate
movement and squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment bond and
remove sanding dust.
1.
Install underlayment reinforcement recommended in writing by manufacturer.
D.
Metal Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, rust,
foreign matter, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond. Apply corrosionresistant coating compatible with underlayment if recommended in writing by underlayment
manufacturer.
E.
Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes,
sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond, and prepare surfaces
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
03 54 16 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.3
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
APPLICATION
A.
General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after
application recommended in writing by manufacturer.
Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and
intercoat adhesion.
At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to
continue through underlayment.
B.
Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
C.
Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.
1.
2.
Apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface.
Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
D.
Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination
during application and curing processes.
E.
Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in
writing by underlayment manufacturer.
F.
Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including
areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.
3.4
PROTECTION
A.
Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.
035416-05/bac
03 54 16 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Miscellaneous rough carpentry for blocking, nailers and support of other work.
Wood structural panels (plywood) for miscellaneous applications.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in
least dimension.
B.
Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit for panel products.
B.
Sustainable Design Submittals for LEED-ID&CI 2009 (v3):
1.
2.
3.
C.
Completed "LEED Criteria Worksheet," for each material of the product, assembly, or
used in the installation of Work of this section. Refer to Division 01 Section 01 81 13,
"Sustainable Design Requirements."
Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC
content.
Credit IEQ 4.4: For composite wood products, documentation indicating that product
contains no urea formaldehyde.
Wood Treatment Data:
1.
Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. nclude statement that
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
A.
1.6
A.
moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to
Project site.
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing
agency.
For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and
after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing
agency according to ASTM D 5664.
For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES showing compliance with building code:
1.
2.
1.5
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Wood-preservative-treated wood.
Fire-retardant-treated wood.
Stack lumber and plywood panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
WARRANTY
Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
2.
Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights and protection
that the Owner may have under the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated, certified by the ALSC
Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
Wood Structural Panels:
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Plywood: Comply with requirements of DOC PS 1 and APA - The Engineered Wood
Association.
General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30U, "Engineered
Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.
Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness
indicated.
Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1.
1.
Uses:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground.
Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground.
Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
B.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
D.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with
masonry or concrete.
Wood members in exterior assemblies.
Wood members less than 18 inches above grade.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame
spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of
significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with
the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any
time during the test.
1.
Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
2.
3.
C.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less
when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity.
Design Value Adjustment Factors:
Treated lumber shall be tested according
ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to
ASTM D 6841
Materials Exposed within Plenums: Where fire-retardant treated lumber and plywood materials
are exposed within noncombustible ceiling plenums, provide materials that comply with the
following surface burning characteristics when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1.
2.
Flame spread index: Maximum 25.
Smoke developed index: Maximum 50.
D.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
E.
Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
A.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1.
2.
B.
2.5
A.
Blocking.
Nailers.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, No. 2, or Stud grade lumber with 19
percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Concealed blocking.
Plywood backing panels.
All wood members not indicated to receive preservative treatment.
Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA or WCLIB.
Northern species; NLGA.
Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.
For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
WOOD STRUCTURAL PANELS
Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels:
DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D
Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch
nominal thickness.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
B.
2.6
A.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Miscellaneous Backing Panels: APA Rated Sheathing, Group 1, Exposure 1, fire-retardant
treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness.
FASTENERS
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this Article for material and manufacture.
1.
Provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153 or Type 304
stainless steel.
B.
Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D.
Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
F.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,
where indicated, flat washers.
G.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1.
2.7
A.
Material:
Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Adhesives for Gluing: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use
indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
1.
VOC Content Limits: Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other
construction.
B.
Framing Standard:
Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
C.
Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
E.
Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
F.
Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
G.
Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1.
2.
H.
3.2
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code 2009/New
Jersey Edition.
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed
to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.
WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A.
Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
B.
Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces,
unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry
work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement.
3.3
WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30U, "Engineered
Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.
B.
Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of panels or pieces that are too small to use
with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
C.
Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting
construction, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Do not bridge building expansion or other movement joints; cut and space edges of panels to
match spacing of structural support elements.
E.
Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.
F.
Fasten panels to substrates indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 6
Gensler
12.7468.005
G.
3.4
A.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Fastening Methods: Fasten panels to supports with screws.
PROTECTION
Protect rough carpentry from weather.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 7
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 06 40 23 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes interior architectural woodwork:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Plastic-laminate cabinets.
Plastic-laminate countertops.
Solid-surfacing material countertops.
Wood paneling.
Wood cabinets.
Closet and utility shelving.
Interior standing and running trim.
Shop priming of interior woodwork to receive painted finish.
Shop finishing of cabinets to receive opaque lacquer finish.
Shop finishing of cabinets to receive transparent finish.
Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for concealed countertop supports.
Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for concealed blocking for millwork items.
Section 12 36 61 "Simulated Stone Countertops" for stone countertops applied to
architectural cabinetry.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit product data for each material and product specified and incorporated
into items of architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation.
1.
2.
3.
Cabinet hardware and accessories.
Finishing materials and processes.
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
B.
Product Data: Submit product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing locations of each item, dimensioned plans and
elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. Elevations shall be
drawn at a scale of not less than 1/2" = 1'-0" (1:20). Details shall be drawn at a scale of not less
than 3" = 1'-0" (1:5).
1.
2.
Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing, electrical, computer and
telephone equipment and other items installed in architectural woodwork.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Copyright 2013
Gensler
06 40 23 - 1
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.
D.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification
numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.
Samples: Submit samples of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.3
30 April 2014
Five (5) veneer leaves representative of and selected from each flitch to be used for
transparent-finished woodwork.
Three 12 inch (305 mm) by 12 inch (305 mm) sample sets containing a minimum of 2 or
more samples of transparent finished wood-veneer and plastic laminate veneered panel
products, fabricated from each core product, for each veneer specified and demonstrating
the proposed full range of appearance characteristics to be expected in completed work.
Include at least one face-veneer seam in each sample.
Fabric Wrapped Panels: 12 inches (305 mm) by 12 inches (305 mm) of each fabric
wrapped panel product, fabricated from each core product, for each fabric specified and
demonstrating the proposed full range of appearance characteristics to be expected in the
completed work.
Lumber and panel products for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on
one side and one edge. Furnish lumber in 12 inch (305 mm) lengths, furnish panel
samples in 12 inch (305 mm) squares.
Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, for each finish system and
color, with exposed surface finished. Furnish lumber in 12 inch (305 mm) lengths,
furnish panel samples in 12 inch (305 mm) squares.
Thermoset decorative-overlay surfaced panel products, for each type, color, pattern, and
surface finish.
Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches (150 mm) square.
Cabinet Locks: Three samples of each type.
Metal Trim Shapes: Three samples of each type and finish, 12 inches (305 mm) long.
Submit samples of each type of door specified showing construction and finishes
selected. Samples shall be 12 inch (305 mm) by 12 inch (305 mm) corner section.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Maintenance Instructions: Submit maintenance instructions for man-made stone tops.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Single-Source Manufacturing and Installation Responsibility: Engage a qualified Manufacturer
- acceptable to the Architect - to assume undivided responsibility for woodwork specified in this
Section, including fabrication, finishing, and installation. The manufacturer shall have a
minimum of 15 years successful experience in the custom fabrication and installation of
architectural woodwork comparable to that shown and specified, be a member of the AWI,
maintain an organized quality control program, perform its own in-house veneer lay-up work,
and who retains facilities with sufficient capacity and quality to produce the required
architectural woodwork without causing delay to the Project.
B.
Quality Standard: Fabricate and install all architectural woodwork in accordance with the
applicable requirements of Architectural Woodwork Standards, 1st edition, published jointly by
AWI, AWMAC, and WI, unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown.
Copyright 2013
Gensler
06 40 23 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
C.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials identical to those tested for the following
fire performance characteristics per ASTM test methods indicated by UL or other testing and
inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify treated lumber
with classification marking of inspecting and testing organization in the form of separable paper
label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, of imprint on lumber surfaces that
will be concealed from view after installation.
1.
2.
Surface Burning Characteristics for Concealed Blocking, Furring, and Door Subframing:
Not exceeding a flame spread of 25, and smoke developed of 50 when tested per
ASTM E 84 for 30 minutes.
The fire performance finish requirements for all exposed interior wall and ceiling
woodwork (including the paneling but not limited to paneling) substrates in fully
sprinklered spaces shall be as follows which has been taken from the 2008 NYC Building
Code:
Use Group
A-1, and A-2
A-3
B, E, M, R-1
S
Exit Enclosures and
Exit Passageways
Class B
Class B
Class B
Class C
Corridors
Class B
Class B
Class C
Class C
Rooms and Enclosed
Spaces
Class C
Class C
Class C
Class C
Class B: Flame spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-450 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 84.
Class C: Flame spread 76-200, smoke developed 0-450 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 84.
D.
1.5
Forest Certification: Provide interior architectural woodwork produced from wood obtained
from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001,
"FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
A.
1.6
Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage,
and deterioration. Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar
operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation
areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose
environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction
period.
B.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify actual
dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication of
Copyright 2013
Gensler
06 40 23 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
woodwork; and indicate measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule
with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.
2.
1.7
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on shop drawings.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field
measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
COORDINATION
A.
1.8
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
PRE-INSTALLATION COORDINATION MEETING
A.
Meet at the Project site, prior to installation of architectural woodwork, to review the substrate
preparation, installation and coordination with other trades, special details and conditions, and
other topics related to the architectural woodwork. The preinstallation meeting shall include the
Architect, the Contractor, architectural woodworker, and any subcontractors affected by the
architectural woodwork installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified.
B.
Lumber Standards: Comply with applicable provisions for grading and workmanship of AWS
Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 3, and the requirements shown and specified;
where standards conflict the more stringent shall apply. Provide lumber surfaced 4 sides (S4S)
and fabricated to profiles shown. All lumber shall be kiln dried to the moisture content
indicated in AWS, Section 2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Furring, Blocking, Shims: No. 1 Common; Southern Pine.
Door Subframes: No. 1 Common Southern Pine, fire retardant treated to reduce
combustibility.
Solid Hardwood for Opaque Finish: Plain sawn Yellow Poplar, free from checks, splits,
sound knots.
Solid Hardwood for Transparent Finish: Matching each of the Architect's veneer
samples; refer to Finish Schedule on the Drawings for each species.
Wood Veneers:
Copyright 2013
Gensler
06 40 23 - 4
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Species, Matching, and Cut for Transparent Finish: Complying with AWS, Section 4,
and the following:
a.
D.
Wood Panel Products:
1.
Medium-Density Fiberboard (moisture resistant): A sustainable, moisture-resistant,
medium density fiberboard (MDF) panel manufactured from 100 percent post industrial
recycled wood fiber complying with ANSI A208.2, having a minimum 48 pcf (769
kg/m3) density except that minimum for screw holding capacity on face shall be 300
pounds (1333 N) respectively; an ASTM E 84 Class C flame spread rating, minimum 3/4
inches (19 mm) thick, edged and faced as specified, fabricated with binder containing no
added urea formaldehyde.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
SierraPine Composite Solutions; FSC Certified Medite FR.
Panel Source International; Pyroblock Platinum Grade MDF.
Hardboard: ANSI A135.4.
Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive
containing no urea formaldehyde. Available Products:
a.
PanelSource International, Inc.; PureKor Class A Pyroblock® FR Panel.
Thermoset Decorative Overlay (Melamine): Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard with
surface of thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with the
recommendations of the Composite Panel Association's Technical Bulletin "Laminating
Composite Panels."
1.
F.
SierraPine Composite Solutions; FSC Certified Medex.
Panel Source International; Purekor Platinum MDF.
Medium-Density Fiberboard (fire rated): A sustainable, fire rated, medium density
fiberboard (MDF) panel manufactured from 100 percent post industrial recycled wood
fiber complying with ANSI A208.2, having a minimum 48 pcf (769 kg/m3) density
except that minimum for screw holding capacity on face shall be 230 pounds (1022 N);
an ASTM E 84 Class A flame spread rating, minimum 3/4 inches (19 mm) thick, edged
and faced as specified, fabricated with binder containing no added urea formaldehyde.
a.
b.
E.
Provide species and figuring as indicated on the Finish Schedule, book matched
unless otherwise indicated, minimum 5 inch (127 mm) width leaves, complying
with HPVA HP-1, Grade AA, matching Architect's sample.
Types: As indicated in the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: Complying with NEMA LD 3 for Horizontal General
Purpose Grade (HGS) typically and Vertical General Purpose Grade (VGS) where specified.
Nominal thickness for HGS and VGS laminates to be 0.048 inches (1.2 mm) +/- 0.005 inches
(0.12 mm) and 0.028 inches (0.71 mm) +/- 0.004 inches (.10 mm), respectively. Where high
pressure decorative laminate is indicated to be faced with aluminum, provide aluminum sheet
goods specifically made for laminating to vertical MDF and particleboard substrates in sheet
thickness of 0.025 inches (0.63 mm) +/- 0.002 inches (0.05 mm).
Copyright 2013
Gensler
06 40 23 - 5
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
a.
2.
G.
Backing Sheets: Non-decorative, high pressure laminate, NEMA LD3, Grade, types and
thickness to match face sheets and equalize pull.
Solid-Surfacing Material: Provide material that meets or exceeds ISSFA-2-01 performance
standards, consisting of reacted monomers and resins, mineral fillers and pigments and
manufactured in sheets of specific thicknesses. Solid surfacing material shall be solid, nonporous, homogeneous, hygienic, renewable, and, when applicable, may feature inconspicuous
hygienic seams. Solid surfacing material shall be free from conspicuous internal strengthening
fibers.
1.
H.
Adhesives, General: Use only low emitting VOC adhesives that leave no glue lines on finished
surfaces of architectural woodwork. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
1.
VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply
with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a.
b.
2.2
Provide factory applied protective peel coat to prevent surface damage during
fabrication and handling of aluminum faced decorative laminates. Remove
protective peel coat after installation in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. If the film is left in place after installation, exposure to direct
sunlight for a prolonged period may cause a paste residue and create other
problems.
Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
Contact Adhesives: 80 g/L.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: Where indicated, use materials impregnated with fire-retardant chemical formulations
indicated by a pressure process or other means acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to
produce products with fire-test-response characteristics specified.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Do not use treated material that does not comply with requirements of referenced
woodworking standard. Do not use twisted, warped, bowed, discolored, or otherwise
damaged or defective lumber or panel products.
Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise
adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated material
from untreated material.
Treat only door subframing, blocking and furring items.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber: Materials impregnated with fire-retardant chemical
formulations to comply with AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA. Kiln-dry material after
treatment to levels required for untreated woodwork.
Copyright 2013
Gensler
06 40 23 - 6
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
C.
2.3
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2 medium-density fiberboard panels made from
softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel
manufacture and complying with fire-test-response characteristics specified.
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials for a complete installation of
architectural woodwork, except for items specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
B.
Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA
numbers or items referenced to this standard.
C.
Frameless Concealed Hinges for Cabinet Doors (European Type): Concealed all-metal
furniture hinges shall be Grass 3000 Series or equal with free swing only at cabinet doors that
are provided with magnetic latches, adaptable or engineered for 35 mm hinge cup boring
pattern, with minimum 165 degree opening angle, 3 dimensional hinge having adjustments
located in the steel hinge arm, steel or die-cast zinc hinge cups, and plastic insertion dowels to
receive hinge screws. Automatic closing shall engage only in the last 10 degrees of swing. All
hinge pins and linkages shall be hardened. Complying with BHMA A156.9, B01602. Bright
nickel finish (US15).
1.
2.
Hinge Quantity: Provide hinge quantity as recommended by hinge manufacturer based
on cabinet door width, weight, thickness, door material, and hinge cup selection.
Metal Furniture Hinge Manufacturers: One of the following:
a.
b.
Grass America, Inc.; Kernersville, NC.
Blum USA; Stanley, NC.
D.
Piano Hinges: Continuous type, satin finished stainless steel and complying with
BHMA A156.9, B51491.
E.
Round Top Bar Pulls: Back mounted, 6-11/16 inches (170 mm) long, 13/32 inches (10.3 mm)
in diameter, finish as indicated below, complying with BHMA A156.9, B52011, unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
DP128; Doug Mockett and Co., Inc., Torrance, CA.
a.
F.
Satin finished stainless steel.
Catches: Magnetic, complying with BHMA A156.9, B03141 for single doors and B03161 for
double doors.
1.
For Single Doors:
a.
2.
CD41 Single Magnetic Cabinet Catch; Stanley Commercial Hardware, New
Britain, CT.
For Double Doors:
a.
901; Rockwood Manufacturing Company, Rockwood, PA.
Copyright 2013
Gensler
06 40 23 - 7
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
b.
G.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
CD45 Double Magnetic Cabinet Catch; Stanley Commercial Hardware, New
Britain, CT.
Cabinet Shelf Rests: Nickel plated brass or steel, or stainless steel, minimum 6 mm diameter
shelf support pegs in sockets, complying with BHMA A156.9, B04013. One of the following:
1.
2.
3.
Hafele 282.01.701 x 282.50.704; Hafele America, Co., Archdale, NC.
K-10S with K-2 Sleeve; Brusso, Inc., New York, NY.
331 Series Flat Top Shelf Support Pin with 325 Series Insert Grommet; Knape and Vogt,
Grand Rapids, MI.
H.
Closet Rods and Flanges: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter, satin finished chrome plated steel or
satin finished stainless steel with matching end flanges.
I.
Adjustable Shelf Standards and Brackets for Wall-Hung Open-Shelving:
1.
2.
3.
J.
Drawer Slides:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
K.
Standards: Model No. 87ANO Extra Heavy Duty 87-187 Series; lengths as indicated, by
Knape and Vogt, Grand Rapids, MI.
Brackets: Model No. 187 LL ANO for 12- to 24-inch (300- to 600-mm) deep shelves by
Knape and Vogt, Grand Rapids, MI.
Shelf Rests: Model No. 210 ANO End Rest and Model No. 211 ANO Center Rest with
Model No. 129 RUB Rubber Cushions.
Pencil Drawer Slides: Similar to Accuride 2006 having 3/4 extension carburized steel
ball bearing, side mounting, 45 lbs. capacity medium duty load rating, cold rolled steel
slide members and ball retainers, bright electro zinc plate finish.
Drawers less than 4 inches (102 mm) deep: Similar to Accuride 7432 having full
extension carburized steel ball bearing, side mounting, 100 lb. capacity medium duty load
rating, cold rolled steel slide members and ball retainers, cushioned in and outstops,
detent-in, progressive action, positive stop, bright electro zinc plate finish.
Drawers greater than 4 inches (102 mm) but less than 8 inches (203 mm) deep: Similar to
Accuride 7432 having full extension carburized steel ball bearing, side mounting, 100 lb.
capacity medium duty load rating, cold rolled steel slide members and ball retainers,
cushioned in and outstops, detent-in, progressive action, positive stop, bright electro zinc
plate finish.
Drawers greater than 8 inches (203 mm) deep: Similar to Accuride 4032 having full
extension carburized steel ball bearing, rail mounting, 150 lb. capacity heavy duty load
rating, cold rolled steel slide members and ball retainers, cushioned in and outstops,
detent-in, progressive action, positive stop, bright electro zinc plate finish.
Refuse Cabinets: Similar to Accuride 3600-201 having full extension carburized steel
ball bearing, bottom mounting, 175 lb. capacity heavy duty load rating, cold rolled steel
slide members and ball retainers, cushioned in and outstops, progressive action, positive
stop, bright electro zinc plate finish.
Silencers: Provide rubber silencers on jamb and/or head and sill strike areas of all cabinet doors
and drawers, 2 for paired doors, and 3 for single doors. Silencers shall be approximately 1/4inch (6.4-mm) diameter, color compatible with adjacent finish.
Copyright 2013
Gensler
06 40 23 - 8
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
L.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Door and Drawer Locks: All cabinet doors and drawers shall be furnished with locks as
indicated on Drawings. Finish exposed portions of locks to match cabinet pull finish. Furnish 2
keys with each lock and key all locks inside one room alike and provide masterkey for all locks
in Project.
1.
Drawers: Provide one of the following lock assemblies:
a.
b.
2.
Single Doors: Provide one of the following lock assemblies:
a.
b.
3.
b.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "EDP series" by Doug
Mockett and Co., Inc.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: Unless otherwise specified above, or on the Drawings, all exposed
portions of the woodwork hardware shall comply with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish
number indicated.
1.
O.
At inactive leaf, Furniture bolt similar to Hafele 252.02.644, polished chrome, with
strike 251.60.703; Hafele America, Co., Archdale, NC.
At active leaf, provide Single Door lock assembly.
Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) OD,, molded-plastic
grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
1.
N.
Cam lock similar to Hafele 235.12.261, chrome plated, with Offset Cam
219.13.9xx, sized to fit opening; Hafele America, Co., Archdale, NC.
Cam lock similar to Hafele 235.12.221, chrome plated, with surface-mounted
Pairs of Doors: Provide the following:
a.
M.
Cam lock similar to Hafele 235.12.261, chrome plated, with Offset Cam
219.13.9xx, sized to fit opening; Hafele America, Co., Archdale, NC.
Cam lock similar to Hafele 235.12.221, chrome plated, with surface-mounted
Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
Stainless Steel Trim: Custom fabricate stainless steel trim shapes to the sizes, shapes and
profiles shown from the following materials. Provide in standard commercial tempers and
hardness, as required for fabrication, strength and durability from Type 304 alloy. Form
exposed work true to line and level, with flush surfaces and accurate angles. Ease exposed
edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (0.79 mm) radius, unless otherwise shown. Miter
exposed corner joints and machine fit to a hairline joint. All sheet goods shall be provided
finished one side only. Finish designation shown on the Drawings are NAAMM nomenclature.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM A 666.
Bar Stock: ASTM A 276.
Pipe: ASTM A 312, Grade TP 304.
Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.
Copyright 2013
Gensler
06 40 23 - 9
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
P.
Q.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Stainless Steel Trim Finish: Provide the following mechanical finish to the exposed surfaces of
the fabricated work to the extent indicated (NAAMM nomenclature), with texture and
reflectivity as required to match the Architect's sample.
Steel Reinforcing: Carbon steel shapes, tubes and plates complying with ASTM A 36 (shapes
and plates), and ASTM A 500 or A 501 (for tubes).
1.
2.
Shop Primer for Concealed Steel Reinforcing: Provide fast curing, lead and chromate
free, universal modified alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in
FS TT-P-664.
Electrodes for Concealed Steel Reinforcing: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and
electrodes as recommended by producer of metal to be welded.
R.
Resilient Base: Refer to Section 09 65 13 "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories."
S.
Door Hardware: At full sized doors, provide door hardware as scheduled under Section
08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
T.
Hanging (Zee Clip) Strips: Extruded aluminum zee type interlocking clips; type, size and
quantity for the condition of use.
U.
Brushed Aluminum Trim Shapes: Custom fabricate aluminum trim shapes to the sizes, shapes
and profiles shown from the following materials. Provide in standard commercial tempers and
hardness, as required for fabrication, strength and durability. Form exposed work true to line
and level, with flush surfaces and accurate angles. Miter exposed corner joints and machine fit
to a hairline joint. Finish designations are NAAMM nomenclature.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Plate: Alloy 5005 and ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
Bar Stock: ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 211M).
Extrusions: Alloy 6063 and ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
Aluminum Trim Finishes: Provide the following finishes to the exposed surfaces of the
fabricated work to the extent indicated (NAAMM nomenclature), with texture and
reflectivity as required to match the Architect's sample.
a.
Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: Complying with AA-M10M32A31 for an
Architectural Class II, medium satin, clear natural anodized finish.
V.
Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with
ASME B18.6.1.
W.
Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use.
1.
2.
ASTM F 1667 for driven fasteners such as nails, spikes and staples.
ASTM F 547 for nails used with wood and wood based products.
X.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.
Y.
Blind Splines: Specialty devices, as required for tight butt joining, types and size as
recommended by woodwork fabricator.
Copyright 2013
Gensler
06 40 23 - 10
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Z.
2.4
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Covercaps: Where mortises of fastener heads, or draw downs are exposed (blind holes) in
finished work, provide black plastic covercaps.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application,
before shipment to Project site to the maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only
as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide
allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. The width of scribe and filler panels shall not
exceed 1/2 inch (13 mm), or 1/2 inch (13 mm) clear dimension from adjacent wall to outside
face of cabinet door in a 90 degree position, whichever is greater.
1.
2.
Interior Woodwork Grade: Premium and custom grade complying with the referenced
quality standard.
Interior Woodwork Grades:
a.
b.
B.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
1.
2.
C.
Reinforcing shown is minimum. Provide additional steel and lumber reinforcing as
required to sustain imposed loads and to ensure a rigid assembly.
Exposed surfaces shall be free from dents, tool marks, warpage, buckle, glue and open
joints, or other defects affecting serviceability or appearance. Accurately fit all joints,
corners and miters. Conceal all fasteners. Make threaded connections up tight so that
threads are entirely concealed.
Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts
to remove splinters and burrs.
1.
2.5
Premium Grade at transparent-finished woodwork and opaque-finished woodwork
Custom Grade at plastic laminate-finished woodwork and woodwork primed for
field painting
Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
AWS Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.
B.
Wood Veneered Surfaces:
1.
Wood Veneered Species and Matching:
a.
b.
Wood Veneer Species: As indicated on the Drawings and in the Finish Schedule.
Matching:
1)
Grain Matching: Run and match grain vertically for drawer fronts, doors,
and fixed panels unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
Copyright 2013
Gensler
06 40 23 - 11
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
2)
3)
4)
C.
Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Compatible species to that indicated for
exposed surfaces, stained to match.
1.
2.
D.
2.6
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match unless otherwise indicated.
Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Center match unless otherwise
indicated.
Veneer Matching within Room: Provide cabinet veneers in each room and
space from a single flitch with doors, drawer fronts, and other surfaces
matched in a sequenced set with continuous match where veneers are
interrupted perpendicular to the grain.
Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber, stained to match species indicated for
exposed surfaces.
Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
Cabinet Locks: Provide door and drawer locks as indicated on Drawings.
WOOD CABINETS FOR PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH
A.
AWS Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.
B.
Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative of grade indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGS.
Postformed Surfaces: HGP.
Vertical Surfaces: VGS.
Edges: HGS unless otherwise indicated.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated on the Drawings and in the Finish Schedule.
Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative
laminate, Grade VGS.
1.
2.
Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.
Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
D.
Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments
and drawers, unless located directly under tops.
E.
Cabinet Locks: Provide door and drawer locks as indicated on Drawings.
2.7
PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.
B.
C.
Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard or exterior-grade plywood.
Copyright 2013
Gensler
06 40 23 - 12
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
2.8
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
A.
Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: As indicated on Drawings and Schedules.
B.
C.
Factory fabricate components to achieve required shapes, sizes, and profiles shown, without
cracks, spalling, pits, surface porosity, chipped areas, or blisters.
1.
2.
3.
Form all tops in one piece lengths. Provide adhesively bonded backsplashes and aprons
in heights indicated. Form edges to profiles shown. If required, use 2 sheets of
countertop sheet material laminated together using manufacturer's standard adhesive to
form edges. Laminated sections shall be in close contact throughout. Adhesive stains
will not be permitted.
Provide separate 6 inch (152 mm) high end splashes as indicated on Drawings.
Countertops shall be factory cored for plumbing fittings provided under Division 22
Plumbing or as indicated on the Drawings.
D.
Radius corners and edges. Provide 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) radius.
E.
Finish exposed surfaces by trimming and grinding smooth.
2.9
FLUSH WOOD PANELING
A.
Core Material:
1.
2.
B.
Opaque Finished Paneling: Medium density fiberboard.
Transparent Finished Paneling: Medium density particleboard or medium density
fiberboard.
Veneered Surfaces:
1.
Veneer Types:
a.
b.
2.
Opaque Finished Paneling: Exposed MDF.
Transparent Finished Paneling: As indicated on the Drawings and in the Finish
Schedule.
Transparent Finished Panel Matching:
a.
b.
c.
Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Book matched, unless otherwise indicated.
Veneer Matching With Panel Face: Center balance match, unless otherwise
indicated.
Panel Matching Method: Match panels to one another within each separate area by
the following method:
1)
C.
Blueprint sequenced matched panels and components.
Edge Detail: Edge veneer banded with continuous hardwood strips matching face veneer.
Panel joints to be flush type unless otherwise shown.
Copyright 2013
Gensler
06 40 23 - 13
Gensler
12.7468.005
2.10
A.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
WOOD DOOR FRAMES FOR OPAQUE FINISH
Frames shall be constructed in accordance with AWS requirements for interior standards, grade
as indicated, provided in sizes as shown. In addition, comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.11
30 April 2014
Construct in accordance with AWS Sections 3, 6, and 12.
Frames shall be provided in single piece lengths of solid stock hardwood lumber. Form
frames with dadoes or rabbeted joints, plant assembled for paint finish.
Subframing shall be fabricated from solid lumber stock as hereinbefore specified; fire
retardant treated.
INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE AND TRANSPARENT
FINISHES
A.
General: Complying with AWS Sections 3, 6, and 12, fabricated from solid hardwood with
scarfed joints, profiles as indicated, finishes as indicated.
B.
Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
C.
Wood Species: Poplar for opaque finishes; solid hardwood plank finished with transparent
finished wood veneer in veneer cut as indicated on the Drawings to match adjacent transparent
finished veneered items.
2.12
CLOSET & UTILITY SHELVING
A.
Shelf Material: Medium density fiberboard where indicated to be painted; medium density
particle board where indicated for plastic laminate or melamine veneer.
B.
Cleats: 3/4-inch (19-mm) solid lumber or thermoset decorative panel.
C.
Finishes: As shown and scheduled on the Drawings.
2.13
A.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
Construction complying with AWI Woodwork Quality Standards: PC-5 ME particleboard core
doors with minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, properly dried low density hardwood or high
density hardboard crossbanding and transparent finished wood face veneers of the specie and
cut indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Vertical Edges: Same species as face, lumber or veneer, sanded eased edges, without
visible joints in lock or hinge edges and free of knife and saw marks.
Core: Single thickness slab of particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, 1-LD-2, hot
pressed with synthetic resin glue.
Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before
veneering. Glue lines between the stiles and rails shall be minimum Type II complying
with the performance requirements of WDMA TM-6.
Copyright 2013
Gensler
06 40 23 - 14
Gensler
12.7468.005
4.
B.
3.
2.14
A.
Hardware Location: +/- 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
Pulls and Pivots: +1/32 inch (0.8 mm), - 0 inches (0 mm).
Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch (45 mm).
FLUSH WOOD DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
Construction complying with AWI Woodwork Quality Standards: PC-5 CE particleboard core
doors with minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, properly dried low density hardwood or high
density hardboard crossbanding and medium density overlay (MDO) face veneers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Jamb and Head Clearance: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Paired Door Openings Meeting Edge: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) less than nominal door size for
each leaf.
Sill Clearance: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from finished floor.
Machining: Machine wood doors, paneling and frames, for hardware. Comply with final
hardware schedules, shop drawings, and hardware templates.
1.
2.
D.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Crossbanding materials shall extend full width of door with grain running horizontally,
tapeless spliced without voids or show through (telegraphing), and directly glued to core
and blocking. Sand crossbanding before application of face veneer. Face veneer shall
extend full height of door with grain running vertically, tapeless spliced without voids or
show through (telegraphing), and directly glued to crossband. Glue lines between the
face veneer, crossbanding and blocking shall be of a type to comply with specified
warranty using the hot plate process.
Prefitting: Fit wood doors to suit frame opening sizes indicated. Comply with the following:
1.
2.
C.
30 April 2014
Vertical Edges: Same as veneer, sanded eased edges, without visible joints in lock or
hinge edges and free of knife and saw marks.
Core: Single thickness slab of particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, 1-LD-2, hot
pressed with synthetic resin glue.
Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before
veneering. Glue lines between the stiles and rails shall be minimum Type II complying
with the performance requirements of WDMA TM-6.
Crossbanding materials shall extend full width of door with grain running horizontally,
tapeless spliced without voids or show through (telegraphing), and directly glued to core
and blocking. Sand crossbanding before application of face veneer. Face veneer shall
extend full height of door with grain running vertically, and directly glued to crossband.
Glue lines between the face veneer, crossbanding and blocking shall be of a type to
comply with specified warranty using the hot plate process.
Prefitting: Fit wood doors to suit frame opening sizes indicated. Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
Jamb and Head Clearance: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Paired Door Openings Meeting Edge: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) less than nominal door size for
each leaf.
Sill Clearance: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from finished floor.
Copyright 2013
Gensler
06 40 23 - 15
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
C.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Machining: Machine wood doors, paneling and frames, for hardware. Comply with final
hardware schedules, shop drawings, and hardware templates.
1.
2.
D.
2.15
Hardware Location: +/- 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
Pulls and Pivots: +1/32 inch (0.8 mm), - 0 inches (0 mm).
Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch (45 mm).
SHOP FINISHING
A.
Production finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup,
cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
B.
Priming of interior architectural woodwork with field applied opaque finish required to be
performed at fabrication shop are specified in this Section. Refer to Section 09 91 23 "Interior
Painting" for finishing opaque finished architectural woodwork.
C.
Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end grain
surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require
backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative
overlay.
Gluing of face veneers shall, where possible, be by the hot plate method; glued surfaces
shall be in close contact throughout. Glue stains will not be permitted.
Grain of all transparent finished wood shall run in the direction shown, or if not shown,
as accepted on the shop drawings.
Exposed Surfaces:
1.
Transparent Finish:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Opaque Finish:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Grade: Premium.
AWS System 5: Conversion Varnish for close grain woods.
Staining: Natural to match Architect's sample.
Sheen: Match Architect's samples.
Grade: Custom.
AWS System 5: Conversion Varnish for close grain woods.
Color and Sheen: Match Architect's paint samples.
Plastic Laminate Finish: Gluing of plastic laminate surfacing materials shall be by the hot
plate method, glued surfaces shall be in close contact throughout. Glue stains shall not be
permitted.
Copyright 2013
Gensler
06 40 23 - 16
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
4.
E.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Solid Surfacing Finish: Matte.
Unexposed Wood Finish: Alkyd type primer-sealer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
B.
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming before installation.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade
specified in this Section for type of woodwork involved.
1.
2.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, with no distortions, and with no variations in
flushness of adjoining surfaces. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair
damaged finish at cuts.
B.
Anchor woodwork to blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to blocking
with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation.
Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush
with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
C.
Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use
pieces less than 96 inches (2438 mm) long, except where shorter single-length pieces are
necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1.
D.
Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and
finish same as wood base, if finished.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Install cabinets without sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.
Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16
inches (400 mm) on center with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm)
penetration into wood blocking, or hanging strips or with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal
screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
Copyright 2013
Gensler
06 40 23 - 17
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
E.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.
1.
2.
3.
Calk space between backsplash and wall with silicone sanitary sealant specified in
Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop.
Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (406 mm) on
center and to walls with adhesive.
F.
Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips, by blind
nailing on backup strips, splined connection strips, and associated trim and framing. Do not use
face fastening, unless otherwise indicated. Space panels so that reveals are parallel and of
widths indicated.
G.
Built-In Desks and Credenzas: Install without distortion so that doors, and drawers, fit openings
properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors, and drawers, in openings
and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory
items as indicated.
H.
Doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
I.
3.3
Coordinate installation with the work of other trades to ensure exact fit and perfect
alignment. Verify dimensions before proceeding and obtain measurements at job site for
work required to be accurately fitted to other construction.
Do not install wood doors until interior wet work, such as tile, terrazzo, and wallboard
work are complete and dried in the areas to receive the wood doors.
Do not subject wood doors to abnormal humidity, dryness or heat. Do not expose doors
to sudden changes in temperature such as forced heat.
Hang wood doors within frames. Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge
matching clearances specified for factory prefitting.
Field cutting, fitting or trimming, if required, shall be executed in a workmanlike manner.
Cuts made at the job site shall be sealed immediately after cutting, using a clear varnish
or sealer. Restore finish before installation, if fitting or machining is required at the job
site for factory finished doors.
Hardware Installation: Install hardware in accordance with the instructions of the door
hardware manufacturer; refer to Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before
installation of woodwork.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not
possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touchup shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
Copyright 2013
Gensler
06 40 23 - 18
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
3.4
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Anodized aluminum surfaces shall be cleaned with warm water and mild soaps such as
those used for hands or dishes. Do NOT use cleaners that contain abrasives, acids or
alkalis, as they will mar the surface. Do NOT clean metal face with solvents, paint
thinner or adhesive remover. After washing, always wipe the surface completely dry
with a soft, clean cloth. Stubborn stains may be removed with a thin, clean oil and dry
cloth.
PROTECTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer, that
ensures that woodwork will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
Copyright 2013
Gensler
06 40 23 - 19
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fireresistance-rated assemblies and construction.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
A.
General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions and through floor
construction without a fire-resistance rating, provide through-penetration firestop systems that
are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist
passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction
penetrated.
1.
B.
2.
1.4
A.
Exception: Slab on grade floors.
Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings
determined per ASTM E 814:
1.
C.
Division 21 through 23 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations.
Division 26 through 27 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations.
F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with minimum 1-Hour Fratings but not less than the fire-resistance rating of the assembly penetrated.
T-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with minimum 1-Hour Tratings as well as minimum 1-Hour F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items
exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas but not less
than the fire-resistance rating of the assembly penetrated.
For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical
damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions
both during and after construction.
SUBMITTALS
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
07 84 13 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
B.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1.
C.
Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1.
1.5
Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting
agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit
illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping
manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fireresistance-rated assembly.
Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting
agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit
illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping
manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fireresistance-rated assembly.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing through-penetration firestop systems
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted
in construction with a record of successful performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration
and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply
with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"
Article:
1.
2.
1.6
Firestopping tests are performed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or another qualified
testing and inspecting agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for
firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard
referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide through-penetration
firestop systems identical to those indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop
system designations listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) in its "Fire Resistance
Directory."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or
substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B.
Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural
means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.7
COORDINATION
07 84 13 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
A.
B.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration
firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.
Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed
behind other construction until each installation has been examined bybuilding inspector, if
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide through-penetration firestop
systems that are produced by one of the following manufacturers:
1.
Hilti, Inc.
2.
Nelson Firestop Products.
USG Corporation.
3.
4.
3M Fire Protection Products.
B.
Basis of Design: Provide through-penetration firestop systems identical to those indicated by
reference to firestop system designations listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) in its "Fire
Resistance Directory" for categories indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestopping Schedule
included at the end of this Section.
2.2
A.
Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according
to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fireresistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be
compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items
if any.
B.
Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).
1.
2.
C.
Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls and fire partitions.
F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).
1.
2.
3.
Horizontal assemblies include floor/ceiling assemblies.
F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
07 84 13 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
D.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per
UL 1479.
1.
L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening
at 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.
E.
W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested
according to UL 1479.
F.
Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
G.
VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the
following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
1.
2.
3.
Sealants: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
H.
Low-Emitting Materials: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply
with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using
Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
I.
Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to
install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by
penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency
for firestopping indicated.
1.
Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation.
Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to
prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
Fire-rated form board.
Fillers for sealants.
Temporary forming materials.
Substrate primers.
Collars.
Steel sleeves.
FILL MATERIALS
A.
Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete
floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial
extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a
neoprene gasket.
07 84 13 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
B.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during
exposure to moisture.
C.
Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with
intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
D.
Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric
sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.
E.
Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents,
inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.
F.
Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum
foil on one side.
G.
Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement,
fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a
nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.
H.
Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled
with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant
additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect
pillows/bags from being easily removed.
I.
Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand
and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
J.
Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of
grade indicated below:
1.
2.4
Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless
indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.
MIXING
A.
For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping
manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required),
type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other
items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance
of work.
07 84 13 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
B.
3.2
A.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop
systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the
following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials
that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.
Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of
developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose
particles remaining from cleaning operation.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine
primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from
contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would
otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to
remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without
disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.
3.3
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance
Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions
and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B.
Install accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the
position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings
indicated.
1.
C.
Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1.
2.
3.
3.4
After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming
materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.
Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating
items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
07 84 13 - 6
Gensler
12.7468.005
A.
B.
3.5
A.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that
through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new
materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE
Select UL-classified systems from the attached schedule and submit "Through-Penetration
Firestopping Schedule" as specified in Article 1.4, Submittals.
07 84 13 - 7
Gensler
12.7468.005
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE
THIS SCHEDULE INDICATES WHICH SERIES OF UL CLASSIFIED THROUGH PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING (TPFS) ASSEMBLIES ARE ACCEPTABLE
FOR THIS PROJECT BASED ON BARRIER TYPE, BARRIER CONSTRUCTION AND PENETRANT TYPE.
EACH SYSTEM WITHIN A GIVEN SERIES IS CLASSIFIED FOR SPECIFIC PENETRATION CONDITIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL SELECT TPFS
ASSEMBLIES THAT ARE CLASSIFIED FOR USE WITH EACH PENETRATION'S CONDITION BASED ON CRITERIA SUCH AS THE FOLLOWING:
PENETRATION SIZE, PENETRATION SHAPE, PENETRANT SIZE(S), PENETRANT MATERIAL(S), PENETRANT QUANTITY, LOCATIONS(S) OF
PENETRANT(S) WITHIN PENETRATION.
WOOD
W-LSTUDS &
1000
W-L-2000
WALL GYPSUM
SINGLE W-L- SERIES SERIES
WALLBR
UL
000
D
CLASSIFIE PENET SERIE
D
RANT
S OR
W-L-8000 SERIES
MULTIP NOTE
NOTE 5
4
SYSTEM
LE
UL DESIGN NO. PENET
U300 SERIES
RANTS
W-LW-L3000
4000
SERI
SERIES W-L-8000
ES
SERIES
NOTE 5
W-L-5000 W-L-6000 W-L-7000
SERIES
SERIES SERIES
W-L-8000
SERIES
NOTE 5
N/A
N/A
CLIV OR
NOTE 8
NOTE 8
N/A
NONE
NONE NONE NONE
NONE
NOTE 6
NONE
NOTE 7 NONE
W-L1000
W-L-2000
W-L-5000 W-L-5000 W-L-6000 W-L-7000
CLIV OR
WALL METAL
SINGLE W-L- SERIES SERIES
SERIES
SERIES
SERIES SERIES
NOTE 8
STUDS &
UL
0000
W-LW-LGYPSUM CLASSIFIE PENET SERIE
3000
4000
WALLBRD
D
RANT
S OR
SERI
SERIES W-L-8000 W-L-8000
W-L-8000
SERIES
ES
SERIES
SERIES
N/A
N/A
N/A
MULTIP NOTE
NOTE 5
4
NOTE 5
NOTE 5
SYSTEM
LE
UL DESIGN NO. PENET
U400 SERIES
RANTS
EQUAL TO
BARRIER
F RATING
RATING
EQUAL TO F RATING
T RATING
(NOTE 9)
ADDITIONAL
REQUIREMENTS NONE NONE
NONE NONE NONE
NONE
NOTE 6
NONE
NOTE 7
NONE
C-AJC-AJ-2000
C-AJ-5000 C-AJ-5000
C-AJ-7000
WALL POURED
SINGLE
1000 OR
OR W-JOR W-JOR W-JOR W-JCONC.,
UL
W-JW-JC-AJ2000
5000
5000
7000
CONC. CLASSIFIE PENET
C-AJ1000
0000
3000
SERIES
SERIES
SERIES
SERIES
BLOCK
4000
C-AJD
RANT SERIE SERIES
??
OR WOR
OR W6000
J-3000
MULTIP S OR
MASONRY
J-4000 C-AJ-8000 C-AJ-8000 SERIES
NOTE C-AJ-8000 OR W-J- SERI
SYSTEM
LE
OR W-JSERIES OR W-J4
ES
8000 SERIES -8000
8000
N/A
N/A
PENET
NOTE 5
SERIES SERIES RANTS
NOTE
5
NOTE
5
UL DESIGN NO.
EQUAL TO
FOR CONCRETE
BARRIER
BLOCK WALL F RATING
RATING
U900 SERIES
(ANY THICKNESS)
EQUAL TO
F RATING
T RATING
(NOTE 9)
NONE
OTHER RECESSED DEVICES (NOTE 3)
UL LISTED ELECTRICAL BOXES
METAL DUCT
MISC ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
(EXAMPLES: BUS DUCTS)
INSULATED PIPES (EXAMPLES:
COPPER, GLASS, IRON, PLASTIC,
STEEL) IN SYSTEMS OPERATING
BETWEEN 32 DEGF (0 DEGC) AND 122
DEGF (50 DEGC) (NOTE 1)
INSULATED PIPES (EXAMPLES:
COPPER, GLASS, IRON, PLASTIC,
STEEL) IN SYSTEMS OPERATING
BETWEEN 32 DEGF (0 DEGC) OR
ABOVE 122 DEGF (50 DEGC) (NOTE 2)
CABLE TRAYS W/ELECTRICAL
CABLES (NOTE 9)
W-L-5000
SERIES
EQUAL TO BARRIER
RATING
EQUAL TO F RATING
(NOTE 9)
F RATING
T RATING
ADDITIONA
L
REQUIREME
NTS
ELECTRICAL CABLES
NONMETALLIC, UNINSULATED PIPE,
CONDUIT, OR TUBING (EXAMPLES:
PVC, CPVC, GLASS)
FIRE STOPPING
REQUIREMENTS
METALLIC, UNINSULATED PIPE,
CONDUIT, OR TUBING (EXAMPLES:
COPPER, IRON, STEEL)
PENETRANT TYPE
NO PENETRANTS
BASIS OF CONSTRUCTION
TYPE
BARRIER
NONE
NOTE 8
NONE
NOTE 8
07 84 13 - 8
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
ADDITIONAL
REQUIREMENTS
NONE NONE
NONE NONE NONE
NONE
NOTE 6
NONE
NOTE 7
NONE
C-BKWALL POURED
SINGLE
1000 OR
CONC.
UL
W-KN/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
BLOCK CLASSIFIE PENET
1000
W-KOR
D
RANT NOTE SERIES
N/A
N/A
4000
N/A
MASONR
4
SERIES
MULTIP
Y
SYSTEM
LE
N/A
UL DESIGN NO.
PENET
FOR CONCRETE
RANTS
BLOCK WALL EQUAL TO BARRIER
U900 SERIES
F RATING
RATING
MINIMUM
THICKNESS
EQUAL TO
F RATING
GREATER THAN
EIGHT INCHES
T RATING
(NOTE 9)
ADDITIONAL
REQUIREMENTS NONE
FRAMED
FLOOR
SINGLE
F-C-1000 F-C-2000
F-C-5000
F-C-5000
F-C-7000
UL
SERIES SERIES
SERIES
SERIES
SERIES
F-CCLASSIFIE PENET
3000
??
D
RANT NOTE
N/A
N/A
SERI
4
MULTIP
ES
F-C-8000
F-C-8000
SYSTEM
LE
F-C-8000 SERIES
SERIES
SERIES
N/A
N/A
NOTE 5
PENET
NOTE 5
NOTE 5
RANTS
EQUAL TO
BARRIER
F RATING
RATING
EQUAL TO
F RATING
T RATING
(NOTE 9)
ADDITIONAL
NONE NONE NONE
NONE
NOTE 6
NONE
NOTE 7
NONE
FLOO POURED
C-AJ-5000 C-AJ-5000
C-AJ-7000
C-AJ- C-AJ-2000
C-AJR
CONC.
SINGLE
OR F-AOR F-AOR F-A0000 1000 OR OR F-A- C-AJUL
2000
5000
5000
7000
SERIE F-A-1000
3000 C-AJCLASSIFIE PENET
SERIES
SERIES
SERIES
C-AJS, F-A- SERIES SERIES OR F- 4000
??
D
RANT
A- OR F-A6000
0000
MULTIP SERIE
3000
4000 C-AJ-8000 C-AJ-8000 SERIES
SYSTEM
LE
OR F-AS OR C-AJ-8000 OR F-A- SERI SERIES OR F-A8000 SERIES -8000
8000
N/A
N/A
ES
NOTE
NOTE 5
SERIES SERIES PENET
4
RANTS
NOTE 5
NOTE 5
EQUAL TO
BARRIER
ANY THICKNESS
F RATING
RATING
EQUAL TO
F RATING
T RATING
(NOTE 9)
ADDITIONAL
NONE NONE NONE
NONE
NOTE 6
NONE
NOTE 7
NONE
FLOO POURED
C-BJ- C-BJ-2000
C-BJ-5000 C-AJ-5000
C-BJ-7000
R
CONC.
SINGLE
1000 OR OR F-B- C-BJOR F-BOR F-AOR F-BUL
C-BJ- F-B-1000
2000
5000
5000
7000
3000 C-BJCLASSIFIE PENET 0000
SERIES SERIES OR F- 4000
SERIES
SERIES
SERIES
C-AJD
RANT SERIE
??
B- OR F-B6000
MULTIP S OR
3000
4000 C-AJ-8000 C-BJ-8000 SERIES
NOTE C-BJ-8000 OR F-BSYSTEM
LE
OR F-BSERI SERIES OR F-A4
8000 SERIES -8000
8000
N/A
N/A
ES
PENET
NOTE 5
SERIES SERIES RANTS
NOTE 5
NOTE 5
MINIMUM
EQUAL TO
THICKNESS
BARRIER
GREATER THAN
F RATING
RATING
FIVE INCHES
EQUAL TO
F RATING
T RATING
(NOTE 9)
ADDITIONAL
NONE NONE NONE
NONE
NOTE 6
NONE
NOTE 7
NONE
THIS SCHEDULE USES THE IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS OF UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC. AS DEFINED IN THEIR "FIRE
RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" AND AS USED BY MANUFACTURERS ON THEIR UL CLASSIFIED SYSTEM.
NONE
NOTE 8
NOTE 8
NONE
NOTE 8
NONE
NOTE 8
NONE
INDICATED RATINGS MAY BE EXCEEDED. "N/A" = NOT APPLICABLE
07 84 13 - 9
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
NOTES
1. EXAMPLES OF SYSTEMS THAT OPERATE BETWEEN 32 DEGF (0DEGC) AND 122 DEGF (50 DEGC):
DOMESTIC HOT WATER
CHILLED WATER
LESS THAN 122 DEGF (50
SUPPLY & RETURN
DEGC)
DOMESTIC HOT WATER
HEAT PUMP WATER
RECIRCULATION LESS
SUPPLY & RETURN
THAN 122 DEGF (50 DEGC)
DOMESTIC COLD
WATER
2. EXAMPLES OF SYSTEMS OPERATING BELOW 32 DEGF (0DEGC) OR ABOVE 122 DEGF (50 DEGC):
STEAM SUPPLY &
HEATING HOT WATER
RETURN
SUPPLY & RETURN
HOT-CHILLDED WATER
STEAM VENT
SUPPLY & RETURN
CONDENSATE PUMP
GLYCOL HEATING HOT
DISCHARGE
WATER SUPPLY & RETURN
DOMESTIC HOT WATER
BOILER BLOW DOWN
SUPPLY 140 DEGF (60 DEGC)
DOMESTIC HOT WATER
RECIRCULATION 140 DEGF
CRYOGENIC VENT
(60 DEGC)
3. EXAMPLES OF OTHER RECESSED DEVICES:
MEDICAL GAS ZONE
VALVES
UNIT HEATERS
MEDICAL GAS OUTLETS FIRE FIGHTERS' PHONE
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
FIRE VALVE CABINETS CABINET
FIRE HOSE CABINETS
4. SEAL OPENING USING BARRIER'S ORIGINAL CONSTRUCTION.
5. WHERE A SERIES 8000 CLASSIFIED SYSTEM IS NOT AVAILABLE, INSTALL PENETRANTS SINGLY, AND PROVIDE SINGLEPENETRANT SYSTEMS.
6. FOR SYSTEMS THAT OPERATE BELOW 32 DEGF (0DEGC) OR ABOVE 122 DEGF (50 DEGC), COMPLY WITH THE FOLLOWING
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. PROVIDE TPFS SYSTEM USING INTUMESCENT
ELASTOMERIC WRAP STRIP AS ITS FILL, VOID, OR CAVITY
MATERIAL.
B. DO NOT USE SERIES 8000 PENETRATIONS. PROVIDE
ONLY SINGLE PENETRATIONS.
7. FOR PENETRATIONS PROTECTED WITH DAMPERS, PROVIDE TPFS SYSTEM APPROVED BY DAMPER MANUFACTURER.
8. WHERE UL CLASSIFIED SYSTEMS ARE NOT AVAILABLE FOR OTHER RECESSED DEVICES, MAINTAIN CONTINUITY OF RATED
BARRIER CONSTRUCTION AROUND RECESS.
9. PROVIDE PILLOW TYPE FIRESTOP SYSTEM TO FILL VOIDS IN CABLE TRAYS AT COMPUTER SERVER ROOMS, AND WHERE
INDICATED AS "FREQUENTLY MODIFIED" LOCATIONS.
10. THE
USE OF GYPSUM PRODUCTS IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
NOTE:
For Project Closeout, submit a list of firestop systems installed
by UL design assembly designations and the location of each
firestop system.
07 84 13 - 10
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
This Section includes joint sealants for the applications indicated.
A.
Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B.
Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and waterresistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples
with joint sealants in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Exposed sealant work shall be performed by a single firm specializing
in the installation of sealants who has successfully produced work comparable to this project, in
not less than three projects of similar scope to the satisfaction of the Architect, and whose work
has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance for a period of 10
years. Concealed sealant work shall be the responsibility of the subcontractor whose work
requires concealed or internal sealant applications.
B.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
1.6
Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
A.
B.
1.7
A.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating
manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and
mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent
their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 degrees F.
When joint substrates are wet.
Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint
substrates.
B.
Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are
less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
C.
Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants
capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.8
A.
WARRANTY
1.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B.
VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply
with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24):
1.
2.
Sealants: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.
2.2
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
B.
Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining
to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248
and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C.
Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
Class: 50.
Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, O.
Application: Joints in exterior wall assemblies and concealed metal flashing joints
(moving joints).
Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
GE Advanced Materials; SilPruf LM SCS2700.
Pecora Corporation; 864 or 890.
Tremco; Spectrem 3 or Spectrem 1.
Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
Pecora Corporation; 301 NS or 311 NS.
Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 800.
Class: 50.
Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic).
Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, O.
Application: Joints in exterior paving or pavements (moving joints).
Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant:
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.
GE Advanced Materials; Sanitary SCS1700.
Pecora Corporation; 898.
Tremco; Tremsil 200.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and O.
Provide products containing a fungicide for mildew resistance.
Application: Joints in interior wet areas.
Single-Component Pourable Urethane Sealant:
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
A.
Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-201.
Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 1CSL.
Tremco; Tremflex S/L or Vulkem 45.
Type and Grade: S (single component) and P (pourable).
Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic).
Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and O.
Application: Interior floor joints.
LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
2.
2.4
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Pecora Corporation; AC-20+Silicone.
Tremco; Tremflex 834.
Application: Interior wall joints and perimeter of frames.
JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A.
General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with
joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: One of the following preformed, compressible, resilient,
nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding backings of flexible plastic foam complying with
ASTM C 1330, and of type indicated below. Select shape and density of cylindrical sealant
backings in consultation with the manufacturer for proper performance in specific condition of
use in each case.
1.
Type C: Closed-cell polyethylene foam material with a surface skin, which is
nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, non-outgassing in unruptured state. Provide one of
the following:
a.
b.
2.
HBR Closed Cell Backer Rod; Nomaco, Inc.
Sonneborn Sonolastic Closed-Cell Backer-Rod; ChemRex, Inc.
Type B: Bi-cellular reticulated, polymeric foam material with a surface skin, nonoutgassing, with a density of between 24-48 kg/cubic meter per ASTM D1622 and
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 4
Gensler
12.7468.005
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
minimum tensile strength of greater than 200 kPa per ASTM D1623, and with water
absorption less than 0.10 gm/cc per ASTM C1016. Provide one of the following:
a.
b.
C.
2.5
SofRod; Nomaco, Inc.
Sonolastic Soft Backer-Rod; ChemRex, Inc.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene, TFE fluorocarbon, or other plastic tape recommended by
sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler
materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure.
Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote
optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and which
will not stain nor mar the finish of surfaces adjacent to joints to which it is applied.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance.
B.
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1.
2.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of
developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after
cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed
air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Concrete.
Masonry.
Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Metal.
Glass.
Porcelain enamel.
Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas
of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without
disturbing joint seal.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A.
General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C.
Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1.
2.
3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
D.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
E.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1.
2.
3.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 6
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
F.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads
of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant
with sides of joint.
1.
2.
3.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
CLEANING
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
PROTECTION
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 7
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 08 12 16 - INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.
Interior aluminum frames for glazing.
Related Sections include:
1.
1.2
Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and gasketing.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of interior aluminum frame and panel
indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate frame throat dimensions, details of each frame type, elevations of door
design types, details of construction; location and installation requirements of door hardware and
reinforcements, hardware group numbers; details of joints and connections; and finishes.
C.
Samples: For each type of corner construction and each type of exposed finish required.
Prepare samples from same material to be used for the Work.
D.
Door and Frame Schedule. Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings.
E.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
F.
Certificate of Compliance for Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide copies of testing agency's
Certificate of Compliance for fire rated door assemblies, smoke and draft control door
assemblies, and temperature rise rated door assemblies.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer, with not less than five years experience, who
has completed interior aluminum framing systems similar in material, design, and extent to
those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum frames through one source from a single manufacturer
with the capacity and resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties.
C.
Product Options: Drawings indicate dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of
components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining
INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES
08 12 16 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
construction dimensions. Other manufacturers' products complying with requirements may be
considered. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."
1.
1.4
Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Architect for review.
A.
Protect doors and frames from damage during transit, job storage, and installation.
B.
Inspect frames on delivery for damage. Tool marks, rust, blemishes and any other damage on
exposed surfaces will not be acceptable. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be
repaired as directed by Architect. Store frames at building site in a dry location, off the ground,
and in such a manner as to prevent deterioration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
Frameworks Manufacturing – Type 2, clear anodized.
B.
Basis of Design: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of interior
aluminum frames and are based on Frameworks. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) alloy 6063-T5 or alloy and temper
required to suit structural and finish requirements.
B.
Recycled Content of Aluminum Products: Provide products with an average recycled content
so that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not
less than 45 percent.
2.3
A.
COMPONENTS
Aluminum Components: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated.
1.
2.
Extrusions for Framing Components and Trim: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 or alloy and
temper required to suit structural and finish requirements, not less than 0.062 inch thick.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
B.
Door Frames: Reinforced for hinges and strikes.
C.
Glazing Frames: For glazing thickness indicated.
08 12 16 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
D.
E.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch thick, with removable snap-in casing trim
glazing stops and door stops without exposed fasteners.
Metal Panels: Laminated, metal-faced flat panels with no deviations in plane exceeding 0.8
percent of panel dimension in width or length.
1.
2.
3.
Nominal panel thickness: 1/4-inch, minimum.
Panel sizes: As indicated on Drawings.
Exposed panel surfaces (each face): Fabricate from aluminum sheet or plate.
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
2.4
Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for panel finish and texture indicated.
Finish: Match framing components.
Texture: Smooth.
Panel Core: Manufacturer's standard.
Panel edges: Square.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners
compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items
being fastened.
B.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded plastic, to accommodate glazing
thickness indicated.
C.
Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
D.
Hardware: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
E.
Gaskets/ Silencers:
1.
2.
3.
2.5
Door Openings: Provide vinyl or pile continuous gasket/silencer in Architect's choice of
white, gray, or black.
Fire-Rated Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Provide continuous smoke- and
draft-control gasket complying with fire-rating requirements in Architect's choice of
white or black.
Glazed Units: Provide continuous vinyl gasket in Architect's choice of white, gray, or
black.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate all components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners.
B.
Fabricate frames with butt, mitered, or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless
face joints. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for precise butt or
mitered connections.
C.
Prepare frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware
schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier.
08 12 16 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
D.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Reinforce frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Machine jambs and prepare for
hardware, with concealed reinforcement plates, drilled and tapped as required, and fastened
within frame with concealed screws.
E.
Locate hardware as indicated.
F.
Provide terminated stops.
G.
Door Silencers: Continuous gasket at frame head and both jambs.
H.
Fabricate frames for glass to allow glass replacement without dismantling frame.
I.
Glazing Stops: Provide non-removable stops on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers,
and other panels in doors. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass,
louvers, and other panels in doors.
J.
Astragals: As required by NFPA 80 to provide fire ratings indicated.
K.
Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Door Frames: Not more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and
heads, except not more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch
(19 mm) at bottom.
2.6
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
C.
Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating
0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine walls, floors, and ceilings, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance
of work.
1.
2.
3.2
Verify that wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by throat size
indicated.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install frames plumb and square, securely anchored to substrates with fasteners recommended
by frame manufacturer.
08 12 16 - 4
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
B.
2.
3.
3.3
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Fire-Rated Frames: Install according to NFPA 80 and fire label requirements.
Install partition components in the longest possible lengths; components up to 48 inches (1200
mm) long must be one piece. Fasten to suspended ceiling grid on maximum 48-inch (1200mm) centers, using sheet metal screws or other fasteners approved by frame manufacturer.
1.
C.
30 April 2014
Use concealed installation clips to ensure that splices and connections are tightly butted
and properly aligned.
Secure clips to main structural extrusion components and not to snap-in or trim members.
Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete.
After installation, remove protective wrappings from frames. Refinish or replace frames
damaged during installation. Touch up marred areas so touchup is not visible from a distance of
48 inches (1200 mm). Remove and replace frames that cannot be refinished to satisfaction of
the Architect.
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed frame and panel surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods
recommended by frame manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 & 610.
B.
Touch up marred frame and panel surfaces. Remove and replace components with damaged
finishes that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
08 12 16 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Solid-core flush wood doors.
Shop priming flush wood doors.
Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
Division 8 Section "Hollow Metal Frames."
Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for hardware requirements.
Division 9 Section "Painting."
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for
openings. Include data for factory-finishing and shop-applied coatings.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Dimensions and locations of blocking.
Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
Dimensions and locations of cutouts.
Undercuts.
Requirements for veneer matching.
Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.
D.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200
by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish,
provide set of three Samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in
finished Work.
Plastic laminate, 6 inches (150 mm) square, for each color, texture, and pattern selected.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 14 16 - 1
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), with door
faces and edges representing actual materials to be used.
a.
b.
c.
4.
5.
1.4
Provide Samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required.
Provide Samples for each color, texture, and pattern of plastic laminate required.
Finish veneer-faced door Samples with same materials proposed for factoryfinished doors.
Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material and finish
specified.
Frames for light openings, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material, type, and finish
required.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Quality Standard:
Edition.
C.
Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Provide doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by
a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated.
1.
1.5
Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," 8th
Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric (neutral) pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.
A.
Protect wood doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and
deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
C.
Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the
remainder of the construction period.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 14 16 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
a.
b.
2.
3.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067by-2134-mm) section.
Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch
(0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span.
Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Algoma Hardwoods Inc.
Eggers Industries.
VT Industries Inc.
SOLID CORE DOORS
A.
Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that
do not contain added urea-formaldehyde resins.
B.
Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1.
2.
Grade: Premium.
Faces: Any closed-grain hardwood of mill option.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Apply MDO to standard-thickness, closed-grain, hardwood face veneers or directly
to high-density hardboard crossbands.
Hardboard Faces: ANSI A135.4, Class 1 (tempered) or Class 2 (standard).
MDF Faces: ANSI A208.2, Grade 150 or Grade 160.
Exposed Verticaland Top Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood.
Core: Particleboard.
Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is
abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.
Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.
Cores for fire doors: Mineral core.
a.
Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced
quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating
indicated.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 14 16 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
b.
c.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability
approved for use in fire doors of fire-protection ratings indicated where needed to
eliminate through-bolting hardware.
Vertical Edge Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge
construction meeting label requirements, with intumescent seals concealed by outer
stile matching face veneer, and meeting or exceeding the specified direct screw
withdrawal, split resistance, cycle slam, and hinge loading criteria. Finish outer
bands to match door faces without joints
1)
2)
3)
4)
9.
10.
11.
C.
A.
Provide closed-grain hardwood species compatible with door faces.
Include glazing compounds or tapes sized for back bevel or quirk provided. Include finish
nails for removable stops sized in accordance with wood door manufacturer's
recommendations.
FABRICATION
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1.
B.
Pairs: Provide fire-rated pairs with fire-retardant stiles matching face veneer that are
labeled and listed for kinds of applications indicated without formed-steel edges and
astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals.
Faces: Medium-density overlay. Apply medium-density overlay to standard thickness,
closed-grain, hardwood face veneers.
Adhesives: Do not use adhesives containing urea formaldehyde.
Wood Beads for Light Openings: Manufacturer’s standard flush designed, solid wood,
rectangular shaped, back beveled or quirked.
1.
2.
2.3
Split Resistance: Not less than 696 pounds when tested in accordance with
WDMA TM-5; or, not less than 1305 pounds when tested in accordance with
ASTM D143.
Cycle/Slam: Not less than 200,000 cycles with no loosening of hinge screws
or other visible signs of failure when tested in accordance with the
requirements of WDMA TM-7; or, not less than 502,000 cycles when tested in
accordance with ANSI A151.1
Direct Screw Withdrawal: Not less than 700 pounds when tested in
accordance with WDMA TM-10; or, not less than 877 pounds when tested in
accordance with ASTM D1037 using #12 x 1-1/4 steel screws, threaded to the
head with either A or AB wood threads.
Hinge Loading: Not less than 684 pounds average when tested in accordance
with WDMA TM-8.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with
DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115W series standards, and hardware templates.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 14 16 - 4
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
C.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining.
Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
1.
2.
2.4
30 April 2014
Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with
applicable requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS
A.
Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads
unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Wood Species: Same species as door faces .
Profile: Flush rectangular beads .
At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads and
metal glazing clips approved for such use.
B.
Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard
wood-veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for
use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where
required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.
C.
Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed
of 0.048-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; factory primed for paint with bakedenamel- or powder-coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating
indicated.
2.5
SHOP PRIMING
A.
General: Comply with referenced quality standard for application of shop-applied coatings.
Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not
surface applied, before coating.
B.
Doors for Field-Applied (Opaque) Finish: Shop prime faces and edges of doors, including
cutouts, with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1.
2.
B.
Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
Reject doors with defects.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 14 16 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.2
A.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
INSTALLATION
Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1.
Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
B.
Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
C.
Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
D.
Field-Finished Doors: Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for finishing requirements.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B.
Replace or repair doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be
repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or
refinishing.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 14 16 - 6
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 08 31 13 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
1.
2.
1.3
Wall access doors and frames.
Ceiling access doors and frames.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated. Include construction details,
materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes for access doors and frames.
B.
Schedule: Provide complete door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching
or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may
vary slightly from sizes indicated.
C.
Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to
access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics according to the
following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1.
2.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
NFPA 252 or UL 10B for fire-rated access door assemblies installed vertically.
NFPA 288 for fire-rated access door assemblies installed horizontally.
COORDINATION
Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to
concealed equipment, and indicate on schedule specified in "Submittals" Article.
Protect doors and frames from damage during transit, job storage, and installation.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08 31 13 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
A.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
J. L. Industries, Inc.
Karp Associates, Inc.
Chicago Metallic Corp.
STEEL MATERIALS
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
1.
2.
ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
ASTM A 153, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B.
Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 591 with cold-rolled steel sheet
substrate complying with ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS) with A60 zinc-iron-alloy
(galvannealed) coating or G60 mill-phosphatized zinc coating; stretcher-leveled standard of
flatness; with minimum thickness indicated representing specified thickness according to
ASTM A 924.
D.
Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive
joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board.
E.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
STAINLESS-STEEL MATERIALS
Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304 or Type 316.
Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Locations: Gypsum board wall surfaces.
Door: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame.
Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal with 1-inch-wide, surface-mounted trim.
Hinges: Spring-loaded concealed pin type.
Lock: Key-operated cylinder lock.
Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from stainless-steel sheet.
1.
2.
Locations: Ceramic-tile wall surfaces.
Door: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame.
08 31 13 - 2
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.
4.
5.
C.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal with 1-inch-wide, surface-mounted trim.
Hinges: Spring-loaded concealed pin type.
Lock: Key-operated cylinder lock.
Recessed Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
30 April 2014
Locations: Gypsum board ceiling surfaces.
Door: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal in the form of a pan recessed 5/8-inch for
gypsum board infill.
Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal with drywall bead.
Profile: Square corners.
Operation: Lift and shift type
FABRICATION
A.
General: Provide access door assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.
B.
Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
C.
Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish
attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Exposed Flanges: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches wide around perimeter of frame.
For trimless frames with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board securely
attached to perimeter of frames.
Provide mounting holes in frames to attach frames to framing members in drywall
construction.
D.
Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish.
Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.
E.
Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed.
1.
2.
2.6
For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic
grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.7
STEEL FINISHES
08 31 13 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
A.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Surface Preparation: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental
exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1.
2.
Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent
Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond.
Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPCSP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
Surface Preparation for Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum
solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a
conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds,
mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified
below to comply with ASTM A 780.
a.
B.
2.8
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in
steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting.
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A.
Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
B.
Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated,
free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
1.
2.
Bright, Directional Polish: No. 4 finish.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign
matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
PREPARATION
Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor door
installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of
supports, inserts, and anchoring devices.
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B.
Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels
aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
C.
Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
08 31 13 - 4
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.3
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
A.
Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
B.
Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
08 31 13 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified
in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1.
2.
1.3
Interior doors.
Interior borrowed lites.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in
referenced glazing publications.
B.
Glass Thicknesses:
ASTM C 1036.
1.4
Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to
A.
General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal service conditions and impact loads
(where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation;
Failure of sealants or gaskets;
Deterioration of glazing materials; or
Other defects in construction.
Delegated Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for
detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions.
Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less
than thicknesses and in strengths required to meet or exceed the following criteria:
1.
Glass Thicknesses for Interior Glazing: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply
with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and referenced glazing
publications.
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.5
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B.
Sustainable Design Submittals for LEED-CI 2009 (v3):
1.
2.
C.
1.6
Completed "LEED Criteria Worksheet," for each material of the product, assembly, or
used in the installation of Work of this section. Refer to Division 01 Section 01 81 13,
"Sustainable Design Requirements."
Credit IEQ 4.1: Product Data for sealants and sealant primers, including printed
statement of VOC content.
Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size glazed opening and location.
Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
A.
1.7
Maintenance Data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass
installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass
installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified
Glass Installer Program.
B.
Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain each glass type through a single source from a single
manufacturer.
C.
Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source
from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated.
D.
Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in ANSI Z97.1 and 16 CFR 1201
for Category II materials in accordance with the following:
1.
2.
E.
Building Code: Table 2406.1, "Minimum Category Classification
International Building Code 2006.
Permanently mark safety glazing with certification label of
Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable
jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of
safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
of Glazing," in ICC's
the Safety Glazing
to authorities having
glass, thickness, and
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1.
GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual."
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.8
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
A.
1.9
Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to
glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or
other causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1.
B.
Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 degrees F.
Field Measurements: Verify dimensions to fit by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Glazing Schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GLASS PRODUCTS
A.
General: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses
as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
B.
Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless
C.
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; Class I
(clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated and complying with the
following requirements.
1.
Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass for all safety glazing applications or
hazardous condition locations, except as otherwise indicated.
a.
2.
Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass wherever fully tempered float glass is
not required, except as otherwise indicated.
a.
3.
Surface compression shall be equal to or greater than 10,000 psi.
Surface compression range shall be between 4,000 psi and 7,000 psi.
4.
5.
Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion
parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
2.2
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS UNITS
A.
2.3
Glass Type GL1: Clear Float-Glass Units.
1.
Thickness: As per GANA standards, except as otherwise indicated.
2.
3.
Heat Treatment: Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass.
Application: Interior doors and interior borrowed lites in hazardous locations indicated.
GLAZING GASKETS
A.
Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following elastomers:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864.
EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.
Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.
GLAZING SEALANTS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
VOC Content: Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC
content of not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24).
Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: Match Architect's control sample.
Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.5
Dow Corning Corporation; 795 Silicone Building Sealant.
GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.
Pecora Corporation; 890.
Tremco, Inc.; Spectrem 1.
GLAZING TAPES
A.
Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 4
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
2.
2.6
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with
a full bead of liquid sealant.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass
manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
F.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
2.7
FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A.
Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
B.
Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges
with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
C.
Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following:
1.
2.
3.
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
Minimum required face and edge clearances.
Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
B.
3.2
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
PREPARATION
A.
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B.
Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so
that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave
visible marks in the completed work.
C.
Clean and dry substrates prior to commencement of work.
3.3
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B.
Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to
provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant
thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
C.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.
D.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
E.
Install setting blocks sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless
otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant.
F.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
1.
2.
H.
Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances
and to comply with system performance requirements.
Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of
tape.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 6
Gensler
12.7468.005
I.
3.4
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
TAPE GLAZING
A.
Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B.
Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C.
Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D.
Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E.
Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
3.5
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A.
Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings
exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression
gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure
uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without
developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket
manufacturer.
C.
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.6
SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A.
Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding
into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and
backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance
for optimum sealant performance.
B.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 7
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.7
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to
framing held away from glass or other effective means. Do not apply markers to glass surface.
Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C.
Examine glass surfaces at frequent intervals during construction for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged during
construction period.
E.
Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
GLAZING
08 80 00 - 8
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:
1.
2.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls and framed soffits).
Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings and suspended soffits).
Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for gypsum panel installation and finishing.
Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for non-load-bearing metal
shaft-wall framing, gypsum panels, and other components of shaft-wall assemblies.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested
in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspection agency.
B.
Sound Transmission Characteristics: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and
classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
1.5
WARRANTY
A.
1.
2.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel
products such that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled
content is not less than 20 percent.
B.
Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1.
2.
2.2
Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G40, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.
SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch diameter wire, or
double strand of 0.0475-inch diameter wire.
B.
Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1.
Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching
wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that
imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an
independent testing agency.
a.
2.
Type: Postinstalled, chemical or expansion anchor.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners:
Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type
indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that
imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an
independent testing agency.
C.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter.
D.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538
inch and minimum 1/2-inch wide flanges.
1.
E.
Depth: 1-1/2 inches.
Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1.
2.
Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide
flanges, 3/4 inch deep.
Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.
a.
b.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch.
Depth: 2-1/2 inches.
09 22 16 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
a.
b.
F.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch.
Depth: 7/8 inch.
Grid Suspension System for Ceilings (At Contractor's Option to Conventional Framing):
ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that
interlock.
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.3
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.
Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640-C or 660-C Drywall Furring System.
USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1.
2.
B.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
1.
2.
Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer
runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a.
1)
2)
C.
Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly
indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of
studs.
1.
a.
b.
D.
Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series.
Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak.
Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate:
indicated.
1.
Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch.
09 22 16 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
E.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Cold-Rolled Carrying Channels and Bridging: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet.
1.
2.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0538-inch.
Depth: 1-1/2 inches with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flange.
F.
Clip Angles: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel.
G.
Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment
flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit
insulation thickness indicated.
2.4
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
B.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
C.
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1.
2.
Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt:
ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
nonperforated.
Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,
cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
1.
2.
Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling
runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where
offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure
not more than 24 inches on center.
After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary
for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fireresistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect
adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.
09 22 16 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.3
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
A.
Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.
1.
2.
Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply
to framing installation.
Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply
to framing installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board
assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories,
furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's
"Gypsum Construction Handbook."
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4
INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A.
Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated, but not less than those
required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Hangers: 48 inches on center.
Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches on center.
Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches on center.
B.
Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C.
Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a.
2.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapezes or equivalent devices.
a.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
09 22 16 - 5
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structure including
intermediate framing members or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners
that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers
to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts
that extend through forms.
Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D.
Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
E.
Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet
measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between
parallel members that will receive finishes.
3.5
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B.
Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
C.
Stud Spacing: Space studs as follows:
1.
2.
D.
Single-Layer Application: 16 inches on center, unless otherwise indicated.
Multilayer Application: 16 inches on center, unless otherwise indicated.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1.
2.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;
install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a.
b.
3.
Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required
for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to
match framing required above door heads.
09 22 16 - 6
Gensler
12.7468.005
4.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
a.
5.
6.
Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
Curved Partitions or Elements:
a.
b.
E.
Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along
arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6
inches on center.
Z-Furring Members:
1.
2.
F.
Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistancerated assembly indicated.
Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall
with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven
fasteners spaced 24 inches on center.
At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring
channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more
than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
09 22 16 - 7
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Interior gypsum board.
Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.
Tile backing panels.
Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and
suspension systems that support gypsum board.
Division 09 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings,
provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
1.5
STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat
to prevent sagging.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.6
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C.
Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content such that
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a
minimum of 20 percent by weight.
B.
General:
1.
2.
C.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
D.
G-P Gypsum.
National Gypsum Company.
USG Corporation.
Type X:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Complying with ASTM C 36 or ASTM C 1396, as applicable to type of gypsum board
indicated and whichever is more stringent.
Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and that correspond with support system indicated.
Thickness: 5/8 inch.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Location: All gypsum board construction, except as otherwise indicated.
EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A.
Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 931 or ASTM C 1396, with manufacturer's standard
edges.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 2
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
2.3
G-P Gypsum.
USG Corporation.
Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and that correspond with support system indicated.
TILE BACKING PANELS
A.
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630 or ASTM C 1396.
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
B.
Core: 5/8 inch, Type X as required by fire-resistance-rated assemblies.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178.
1.
2.
C.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensShield Tile Guard" by
G-P Gypsum.
Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9.
1.
a.
b.
2.
2.4
G-P Gypsum.
USG Corporation.
Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.
USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
Thickness: 1/2 inch.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
Shapes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
GYPSUM BOARD
Cornerbead.
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound.
Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated.
09 29 00 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
B.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
2.5
Fry Reglet Corp.
Gordon, Inc.
MM Systems Corporation.
Pittcon Industries.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of
ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5.
Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials
specified.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
Exterior Gypsum Board: Paper.
Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and settingtype, sandable topping compound.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel
manufacturer.
Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 4
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
2.
C.
Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1.
2.
E.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering
gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
1.
D.
30 April 2014
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies:
Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of
assembly.
Recycled Content: Provide blankets with recycled content such that postconsumer
recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of
20 percent by weight.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex
sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission
through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
2.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 + Silicone.
United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames
and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.2
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B.
Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels
not less than one framing member.
C.
Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F.
Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1.
2.
3.
Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4- to 3/8-inch wide joints to install sealant.
G.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch wide spaces at these locations, and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H.
Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to
open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings
and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both
faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with
manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking
paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
J.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1.
Type X: At all gypsum board assemblies except as otherwise indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 6
Gensler
12.7468.005
2.
B.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Type C: At all fire-resistance-rated assemblies except as otherwise indicated.
Single-Layer Application:
1.
2.
On ceilings and soffits, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to
greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally
(perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by a fire-resistancerated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a.
3.
4.
C.
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end
joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
Multilayer Application:
1.
2.
3.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer
joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by a fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger
joints on opposite sides of partitions.
On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer
either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with
vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over
furring members.
Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
D.
Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate
(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum
board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels
until fastening adhesive has set.
E.
Curved Surfaces:
1.
2.
3.4
Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible,
across curved surface plus 12-inch long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to
them.
For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches on center.
Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws
spaced 12 inches on center.
APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A.
Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 7
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
2.
3.5
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Install with 1/4-inch open space where panels abut other construction or structural
penetrations.
Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A.
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
install where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or
penetrations.
B.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and install where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other
construction or penetrations.
C.
Cementitious Backer Units: Comply with ANSI A108.11.
D.
Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a
uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.6
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect.
C.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.7
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
L-Bead: Use where indicated.
Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
for tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM
C 840:
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 8
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
2.
3.
4.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where
indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies
and sound-rated assemblies.
Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners,
and trim flanges where panels are substrate for tile.
Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to
tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless
Level 5: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to
tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire
surface where indicated or where required for special finishes.
E.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels:
instructions.
F.
Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.8
Finish according to manufacturer's written
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 9
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 093000 – TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Tile materials.
Waterproofing and crack suppression membranes for tile installations.
Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations.
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and
isolation joints in tile surfaces.
Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units and tile backing
boards.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint
width indicated.
B.
Facial Dimension: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499).
C.
Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.
1.4
A.
Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the
following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:
1.
1.5
Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
Full-size tile samples.
Grout materials.
TILING
09 30 00 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.
1.6
A.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type and color or finish from one source or
producer.
1.
Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties for each contiguous area.
B.
Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality
for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate
from one source or producer.
C.
Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this
Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product:
1.
2.
1.7
Stone thresholds.
Waterproofing and crack suppression membranes.
A.
Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
B.
Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D.
Store liquid latexes in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
1.8
A.
1.9
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced
standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.10
Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount
installed.
WARRANTY
TILING
09 30 00 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
A.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
1.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PRODUCTS, GENERAL
ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for
Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1.
Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI
standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article.
C.
Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile,
grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other
appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following
requirements:
1.
D.
2.2
A.
Match Architect's samples.
Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and
package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from
other packages and match approved Samples.
TILE PRODUCTS
Basis of Design: Provide products indicated on Drawings and Finish Schedules.
1.
2.
Facial Dimensions: As indicated on Drawings and Finish Schedules.
Provide matching trim materials for project conditions indicated.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.3
Exterior corners.
Interior corners.
Surface bullnose.
Coves.
Base.
THRESHOLDS
A.
General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between
adjacent floor finishes.
B.
Granite Thresholds: ASTM C 615, with honed finish.
TILING
09 30 00 - 3
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
2.
C.
A.
Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained stone with veining.
Variety and appearance: Match Architect's sample.
SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained stone without veining.
Variety and appearance: Match Architect's sample.
Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353
or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish.
1.
2.
2.4
30 April 2014
BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc.
Custom Building Products.
LATICRETE International Inc.
MAPEI Corporation.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:
1.
Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber
liquid-latex additive.
a.
C.
For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
Medium-Bed, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: Provide materials composed as follows, with
physical properties equaling or exceeding those required for thin-set mortars based on testing of
medium-bed specimens according to ANSI A118.4:
1.
Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber
liquid-latex additive.
D.
Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1.
E.
Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.
1.
Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition
to prepackaged dry-grout mix.
a.
b.
c.
2.5
Sanded grout mixture for joints greater than 1/8 inch.
Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and narrower.
Color: Match Architect’s sample.
WATERPROOFING AND CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard products for bonded membrane installations that
comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A118.10 or ANSI A118.12.
B.
Polyethylene-Sheet Product: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing for adhering
to latex-portland cement mortar; 39 inches wide by 0.008-inch nominal thickness.
TILING
09 30 00 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
C.
A.
2.7
A.
Product: DITRA; Schluter Systems L.P.
CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS AND TILE BACKING PANELS
Provide products specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board."
ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
Provide products specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
1.
2.8
Product: KERDI; Schluter Systems L.P.
Corrugated-Polyethylene Product: Corrugated polyethylene with dovetail-shaped corrugations
for adhering to latex-portland cement mortar and with anchoring webbing on the underside; 39
inches wide by 3/16-inch nominal thickness.
1.
2.6
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
A.
Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
B.
Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect
exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and
grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.
1.
2.
C.
2.9
Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with
a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87.
Grout release in form of manufacturer’s standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially
formulated and recommended for use as a temporary protective coating for tile.
Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A.
Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
B.
Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C.
Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
TILING
09 30 00 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.2
Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing
compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of
tile installation standards for installations indicated.
Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before
installing tile.
Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
PREPARATION
A.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil,
or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
B.
Ensure that existing concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar comply with
flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.
1.
2.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound
according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product
specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.
Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
C.
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges approved during Sample submittals,
verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show
same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not
factory blended, blend tiles at Project site before installing.
D.
Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to
prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous
film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.3
A.
ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for
Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods
indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B.
TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with
TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
TILING
09 30 00 - 6
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
C.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for
straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other
penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in pattern indicated on Drawings, and if not indicated, lay out tile work
and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Adjust to minimize tile cutting.
Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
F.
Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar
beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1.
2.
G.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
Latex-portland cement grout: Comply with ANSI A108.10.
At showers areas, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with
ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated.
WATERPROOFING AND CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE INSTALLATIONS
Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written
instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.
1.
B.
Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
Prepare joints for sealant application to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards:
1.
H.
Install full size tile and trim to the greatest extent. Do not install cut tile or trim in less than
half unit widths or lengths unless directed or specifically approved in advance by the
Architect.
Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to
determine that it is watertight.
Install crack-suppression membrane to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to
produce membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule,
including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation
standards.
TILING
09 30 00 - 7
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
B.
3.6
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Paver tiles sized 8 by 8 inches or larger: Comply with requirements and procedures in
ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.
Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with 1/4-inch joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
C.
30 April 2014
Ceramic mosaic tile: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed
as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.
WALL TILE AND TRIM INSTALLATION
A.
Install types of tile and trim designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the
Wall Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI
setting-bed standards.
B.
Joint Widths: Install tile and trim on walls with the following joint widths:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.7
A.
Ceramic mosaic tile: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
Glass mosaic tile: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
Glazed wall tile: 1/16 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
Quarry tile: 1/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
Stone tile: 1/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
Paver tile: 1/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
1.
2.
3.
Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended
by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by
testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and
plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and
after cleaning.
Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer
that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it
from clogging drains.
B.
When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed
tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during
construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
C.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed.
D.
Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
TILING
09 30 00 - 8
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.8
A.
TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
Floor Tile Installation: Interior floor installation on concrete; thin-set mortar; TCA F113 and
ANSI A108.5.
1.
Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar.
a.
2.
B.
2.
3.
Large size (greater than 12-inch by 12-inch) paver tile applications:
medium-bed latex-portland cement mortar.
Provide
Membrane Bond Coat: Latex-portland cement mortar.
Grout: Polymer-modified grout; ANSI A108.10.
Floor Tile Installation Over Crack-Suppression Membrane: Interior floor installation on cracksuppression membrane over concrete; thin-set mortar; TCA F125A and ANSI A108.5.
1.
2.
3.
Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar.
Membrane Bond Coat: Dry-set portland cement mortar.
Wall Tile and Trim Installation: Interior wall installation over gypsum board or water-resistant
backing board; thin-set mortar; TCA W243 and ANSI A108.5.
1.
2.
E.
Provide
a.
D.
Large size (greater than 12-inch by 12-inch) paver tile applications:
medium-bed latex-portland cement mortar.
Floor Tile Installation Over Waterproofing Membrane: Interior floor installation on waterproof
membrane over concrete; thin-set mortar; TCA F122 and ANSI A108.5.
1.
C.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Wall Tile Installation Over Waterproofing Membrane: Interior wall installation over bonded
waterproofing membrane on cementitious backer units; thin-set mortar; TCA W244 and
ANSI A108.5.
1.
Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
a.
2.
Membrane Bond Coat: Latex-portland cement mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
a.
3.
Exception: Provide dry-set portland cement mortar (thin-set) if recommended by
waterproofing membrane manufacturer.
Exception: Provide dry-set portland cement mortar (thin-set) if recommended by
waterproofing membrane manufacturer.
Grout: Polymer-modified grout, ANSI A108.10.
TILING
09 30 00 - 9
Gensler
12.7468.005
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
TILING
09 30 00 - 10
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
B.
Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling
attachment devices to be cast in concrete.
1.3
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
1.4
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches (150 mm)
in size.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required,
prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1.
2.
1.5
Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of each type, color, pattern,
and texture.
Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-)
long Samples of each type, finish, and color.
A.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Suspended ceiling components.
Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.
Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels.
Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 51 13 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Lighting fixtures.
Air outlets and inlets.
Speakers.
Sprinklers.
Access panels.
Perimeter moldings.
B.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C.
Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer
and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
D.
Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and
fastener type, from ICC-ES.
E.
Field quality-control reports.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.8
Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.
Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2
percent of quantity installed.
Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.
Impact Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP for testing indicated.
B.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
2.
1.9
Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
A.
Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they
09 51 13 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C.
Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.10
A.
FIELD CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.
1.
Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before
beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Provide acoustical panel ceilings and suspension systems that comply
with the following:
1.
2.2
Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.
Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
Installation Standard: Reference Standard RS 5-16 of the Building Code of the City of
New York.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Low-Emitting Materials: Acoustical panel ceilings shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
B.
Source Limitations:
1.
2.
Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.
Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.
09 51 13 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
C.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension
system from single source from single manufacturer.
D.
Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
content not less than 20% percent.
E.
Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
F.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated
that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical
ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.
1.
G.
Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each
product type.
1.
2.3
Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of
test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface according to
ASTM E 795.
Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern
designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations,
provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply
with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical
performance, edge detail, and size.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A.
following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
CertainTeed Corp.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
C.
Color: As indicated in Finish Schedule.
D.
NRC: Not less than 0.70.
E.
CAC: Not less than 30.
F.
Edge/Joint Detail: As indicated in Finish Schedule.
G.
Thickness: As indicated in Finish Schedule.
H.
Modular Size: As indicated in Finish Schedule.
09 51 13 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
I.
2.4
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels
treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold,
mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or
bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to
ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A.
Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
content not less than 25 percent.
B.
Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with
applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.
1.
C.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M,
Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
1.
D.
High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for "Coating
Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are
indicated.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory
devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by
testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting
agency.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic.
Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but
provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.
E.
Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
F.
Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch(1-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275)
coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts.
G.
Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to
accommodate seismic forces.
H.
Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic
forces.
09 51 13 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
I.
2.5
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical
panels in place.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A.
following:
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
A.
CertainTeed Corp.
Fabricate main and cross runners from roll formed cold-rolled steel sheet, with prefinished metal
caps on flanges.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
Face Design: Flat, flush.
Cap Material:
a.
b.
5.
6.
Cap Finish: Painted white.
Steel finishes:
a.
b.
2.6
Normal environments: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet.
High-humidity environments: Aluminum cold-rolled sheet.
Normal environments: Prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized
according to ASTM A 653, not less than G30 coating designation
High-humidity environments: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653, not
less than G60 coating designation
METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A.
following:
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
CertainTeed Corp.
Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with
09 51 13 - 6
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that
used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.
1.
2.
3.
D.
2.7
Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and
suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners
unless otherwise indicated.
For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms
reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at
exposed suspension member.
For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter
required to fit penetration exactly.
Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's
extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's
designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying
with seismic design requirements and the following:
1.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04
mm). Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M and coating manufacturer's written
instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A.
1.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a.
b.
2.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
Henkel Corporation; OSI Pro-Series SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant.
Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.
Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective
in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building
construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.
2.
3.
Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant.
Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable,
synthetic-rubber sealant.
Acoustical sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
09 51 13 - 7
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified
in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel
ceilings.
B.
Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture
damaged, or mold damaged.
C.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic
design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's
"Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not
deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing
members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and
appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger
involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to
age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
09 51 13 - 8
Gensler
12.7468.005
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or
power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,
install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported
directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches
(200 mm) from ends of each member.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
C.
Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four
tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers,
without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires
into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
D.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1.
2.
3.
Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of
moldings before they are installed.
Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system
to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and
connect securely.
Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E.
Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat,
precise fit.
1.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of
suspension-system runners and moldings.
For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped flanges, install
panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and panel
faces flush with bottom face of runners.
Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed
panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel
manufacturer.
Install clean-room gasket system in areas indicated, sealing each panel and fixture as
recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions.
09 51 13 - 9
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.4
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special
inspections:
1.
B.
Compliance of seismic design.
Perform the following tests and inspections of completed installations of acoustical panel
ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners in successive stages. Do not proceed with
installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously
completed installations show compliance with requirements.
1.
Extent of Each Test Area: When installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor
has reached 20 percent completion but no panels have been installed.
a.
b.
Within each test area, testing agency will select one of every 10 power-actuated
fasteners and postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test
them for 200 lbf (890 N) of tension; it will also select one of every two
postinstalled anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for
440 lbf (1957 N) of tension.
When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with
requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20
pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency.
C.
Acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners will be considered defective if they
do not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
09 51 13 - 10
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Resilient wall base.
Resilient molding accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Samples for Verification: Manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches
long, for each resilient product required.
C.
Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
50 degrees F or more than 90 degrees F.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70
degrees F or more than 95 degrees F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following
time periods:
1.
2.
3.
48 hours before installation.
During installation.
48 hours after installation.
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F.
C.
Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09 65 13 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.6
A.
WARRANTY
1.
2.
1.7
A.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
EXTRA MATERIALS
1.
Furnish not less than 20 linear feet for each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient
product installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RESILIENT BASE
A.
B.
Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.
1.
2.
C.
Rubber Materials: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset).
Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid).
Style:
1.
2.
Cove (with top-set toe) base is required for resilient flooring.
Straight (toeless) base is required for carpet.
D.
Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.
E.
Height: As indicated on Drawings and Finish Schedules.
F.
Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
G.
Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
H.
Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
I.
Surface: Smooth, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2
A.
RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
Manufacturers: Provide products complying with requirements and manufactured by one of the
following:
09 65 13 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
2.
3.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Burke Mercer Flooring Products.
Johnsonite.
Roppe Corporation.
B.
Material: Rubber.
C.
Profile and Dimensions: As indicated on Drawings and Finish Schedules for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Cap for cove carpet.
Carpet edge for glue-down applications
Reducer strip for resilient floor covering.
Joiner for tile and carpet.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
1.
VOC Content Limits: Comply with the following limits when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a.
b.
Wall Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in
other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign
deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
C.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient
products.
B.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound
and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
09 65 13 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
C.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed.
1.
D.
3.3
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed
at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation.
RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B.
Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C.
Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
D.
Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E.
Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F.
On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G.
Job-Formed Corners:
1.
2.
3.4
Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible with minimum 2 feet
returns. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base
at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only
deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base
thickness.
Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible with minimum 2 feet
returns. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where
corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.
RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B.
Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would
otherwise be exposed.
3.5
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
09 65 13 - 4
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
2.
3.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C.
Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D.
Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.
09 65 13 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 09 65 19 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Solid vinyl floor tile.
Vinyl composition floor tile.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.
1.
C.
1.4
For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches
(230 mm) long, of each color required.
Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
A.
1.5
Qualification Data: For Installer.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.
Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color,
and pattern of floor tile installed.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09 65 19 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.7
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are
competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method
indicated.
1.
1.8
Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by
floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.
A.
1.9
Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient
temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50
deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the
following time periods:
1.
2.
3.
48 hours before installation.
During installation.
48 hours after installation.
B.
After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35
deg C).
C.
Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D.
Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E.
Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
B.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
FloorScore Compliance: Resilient tile flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore
certification.
09 65 19 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
2.2
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
A.
2.3
Products and Manufacturers: Refer to the Drawings and the Finish Schedule. Nominal
thickness not less than 1/8 inch (3 mm) unless greater thickness is scheduled.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based
formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
1.
Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a.
b.
C.
VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
Vinyl Composition Tile Protective Floor Polish: Product recommended by manufacturer to suit
resilient products indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
B.
3.2
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion
of resilient products.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
2.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor
tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
09 65 19 - 3
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.
4.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale
recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.
Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to
floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the
following:
a.
b.
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed
with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate
of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.
Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.
Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative
humidity level.
C.
Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method
recommended by access flooring manufacturer.
D.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
E.
Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed.
1.
F.
3.3
At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation
materials into spaces where they will be installed.
Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
floor tile.
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B.
Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using
cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1.
C.
Lay tiles in pattern indicated.
Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
1.
Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.
D.
Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent
fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E.
Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles
to center of door openings.
09 65 19 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
F.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking
device.
G.
Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers,
and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern
between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to
substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
H.
Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
I.
Seamless Installation:
1.
2.
3.4
Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with
welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare, weld, and
finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.
Chemically Bonded Seams: Bond seams with chemical-bonding compound to
permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare seams and apply compound
to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps, overlays, or excess bonding compound on
flooring surfaces.
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:
1.
2.
3.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C.
Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D.
Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying
liquid floor polish.
1.
E.
Apply three coat(s).
Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
09 65 19 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 096813 – TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Modular carpet tile.
Installation accessories.
Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient base and molding
accessories installed with carpet.
STANDARDS
A.
Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the
applicable provisions and recommendations of the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
A.
SUBMITTALS
1.
2.
B.
The Carpet and Rug Institute "The Carpet Specifiers' Handbook."
The Carpet and Rug Institute "CRI 2011 Carpet Installation Standard."
The Carpet and Rug Institute "Green Label Plus" Standards.
Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade
resistance.
Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate.
Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet tiles.
Existing flooring materials to be removed, if any.
Existing flooring materials to remain, if any.
Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.
Type of subfloor.
Type of installation.
TILE CARPETING
09 68 13 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
7.
8.
9.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Pattern of installation.
Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
Transition details to other flooring materials.
C.
Verification Samples: Full-size tile sample for each color and texture required. Label each
Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated
on Drawings and in schedules.
D.
Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1.
2.
E.
1.5
Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installation Standard:
Standard, 2009.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification
indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
C.
A.
1.7
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
Control Samples: Furnish approved full-size verification samples to carpet manufacturer for
each carpet product style, color and texture required. Control samples shall be used to
demonstrate aesthetic effects, visual characteristics and set quality standards for materials and
manufacture.
1.
1.6
Comply with Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) Carpet Installation
Final approval of carpet materials shall be based on control samples.
Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 7, "Site Conditions" and Section 11,
"Ventilation."
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and
dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
C.
Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to
bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
TILE CARPETING
09 68 13 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.8
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
2.
3.
1.9
A.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge
raveling, snags, runs, dimensional stability, and delamination.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed
and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 3 percent of quantity installed for each type indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
CARPET TILE
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided, recommended or approved by carpet
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, high solids, low VOC emitting
formulations that are specifically recommended by the carpet manufacturer, as verified through
compatibility and adhesion testing for the intended substrate and application to suit products and
subfloor conditions indicated, and that complies with flammability requirements for installed
carpet.
1.
VOC Content Limits: Provide adhesives with VOC content not more than 50 g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other
TILE CARPETING
09 68 13 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and
potential defects.
B.
Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1.
2.
C.
3.2
Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor
Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing
substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.
B.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,
holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more
stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical
methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
D.
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 18, "Modular Carpet," and
with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B.
Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer and as follows:
1.
2.
Perimeter tiles: Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressuresensitive adhesive.
Field tile: Partial glue down; install periodic tiles with releasable, pressure-sensitive
adhesive.
C.
Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
D.
Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut
edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
E.
Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
TILE CARPETING
09 68 13 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
F.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
G.
Carpet Installation Patterns: Comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Finish
Schedules for laying carpet tiles.
H.
Install patterns parallel to walls and borders, unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not
fill seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive.
3.4
A.
Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:
1.
2.
3.
Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B.
Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard, Section 20,
"Protecting Indoor Installations."
C.
Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
TILE CARPETING
09 68 13 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 09 72 00 - WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes wall coverings and accessories necessary for a complete installation.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.2
Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board" for Level 5 finish required under wallcovering.
Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting" for priming wall surfaces.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit product data for each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include location and extent of each wall covering type, seam locations and
termination points.
C.
Samples: Submit wall covering samples in full width by 36-inch (1000-mm) long sections of
wall covering for each wall covering indicated and for each color, pattern, and texture required.
Include sample sets with specified treatments applied. Samples shall show complete pattern
repeat.
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for wall coverings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied
with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84:
a.
b.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has specialized in the installation
of wall coverings similar to that required for this Project.
C.
Mockups: Install mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
WALL COVERINGS
09 72 00 - 1
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
2.
3.
1.5
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Build mockups for each type of wall covering on each substrate required. Comply with
requirements in ASTM F 1141.
Install mockups as shown on Drawings.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall coverings until wet-work in spaces is completed
and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are
and will be continuously maintained at the levels indicated when the site is occupied for its
intended use.
B.
Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a permanent level of lighting is provided on the
surfaces to receive wall covering.
C.
Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time
recommended by the wall covering manufacturer for full drying or curing.
1.6
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, from the same production
run as the wall coverings installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage
and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.7
Rolls of Wall Covering Material: Full-width rolls of wall covering equal to 5 percent of
amount of each type installed, but not less than 1 full roll.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace wall
covering that does not comply with requirements or that fails within two years from date of
Substantial Completion. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of wall covering
from failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to,
blistering, fading, fraying, seam delamination, and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WALL COVERING PRODUCTS
A.
General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from the same run number or dye lot.
B.
Products and Manufacturers: As indicated on the Drawings and in the Finish Schedule.
WALL COVERINGS
09 72 00 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
2.2
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
ACCESSORIES
A.
Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall
covering and substrate application, as recommended in writing by wall covering
manufacturer, and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
B.
Primer/Sealer: Mildew-resistant primer/sealer recommended in writing by wall covering
manufacturer for intended substrate and with a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C.
Wall Liner: Nonwoven, synthetic underlayment and adhesive as recommended by wall
covering manufacturer.
D.
Edge Molding: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T52, one piece stock length manufactured for
specific use as wall covering protective edge.
1.
2.
Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 complying with AAMA 611.
Molding contact adhesive as recommended by molding manufacturer and with a VOC
content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting
performance of Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew,
oil, grease, incompatible primers, dirt, and dust.
C.
Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking,
unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Gypsum Board: Prime with primer recommended by wall covering and primer sealer
manufacturers.
Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity. Prime with
product recommended in writing by manufacturers of primer/sealer and wall covering.
Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding.
Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply rust-inhibitive zinc primer.
WALL COVERINGS
09 72 00 - 3
Gensler
12.7468.005
5.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, concrete masonry
units when tested with an electronic moisture meter.
D.
Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with
fine sandpaper.
E.
Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall covering manufacturer.
Form smooth, wrinkle-free surface for finished installation. Do not begin wall covering
installation until wall liner has dried.
F.
Remove electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items.
G.
Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas
not less than 24 hours before installation.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with wall covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
1.
B.
3.4
Fabric Wrapped Panel Applications: For application of fabrics to stretched fabric wall
systems, refer to Section 09 77 13 "Stretched-Fabric Wall Systems."
Install metal moldings true to line with contact adhesive. Use full stock lengths. Keep joints to
a minimum. Butt joints to form tight hairline cracks. Miter corners.
CLEANING
A.
Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by the wall covering manufacturer. Replace
strips that cannot be cleaned.
B.
Reinstall electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items.
C.
Remove all droppings, trimmings, and other debris, and protect the installation so that it will be
clean and without indication of damage at the time of acceptance by the Architect.
097200/02/11-/dr
WALL COVERINGS
09 72 00 - 4
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 104400 – FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
1.
2.
1.3
A.
Portable fire extinguishers.
Fire-protection cabinets.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection cabinets.
1.
2.
Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.
Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting
methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware,
cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed factory-applied color finish required for
fire-protection cabinets.
C.
Contract Closeout Submittals:
maintenance manuals.
1.4
Operation and maintenance data suitable to include in
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one source
from a single manufacturer.
B.
NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
C.
Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by FMG or an
independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10 44 00 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.6
A.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
WARRANTY
1.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
B.
Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick,
Class 1 (clear).
2.2
A.
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Potter Roemer LLC.
B.
General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet
indicated.
C.
Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal
capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
A.
Valves: Manufacturer's standard.
Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.
Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections,
maintenance, and recharging.
FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Potter Roemer LLC.
10 44 00 - 2
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
B.
C.
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Basis of Design: Provide products indicated on Drawings and Schedules.
Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.
1.
2.
E.
Door Material: Enameled-steel sheet.
Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).
Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1.
2.
F.
Trimless with Hidden Flange: Flange of same metal and finish as box overlaps
surrounding wall finish and is concealed from view by an overlapping door.
Cabinet Capacity: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.
Cabinet Material: Enameled-steel sheet.
Provide door pull and friction latch.
Provide concealed hinges permitting door to open 180 degrees.
Identification: Provide lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,
size, spacing, and location.
1.
Identify fire extinguisher
EXTINGUISHER."
a.
b.
c.
d.
G.
A.
cabinet
with
the
words
"FIRE
Location: Applied to cabinet door.
Application Process: Engraved.
Lettering Color: Black.
Orientation: Vertical.
Exterior of cabinet, door, and trim.
Interior of cabinet and door.
Color and gloss: Match Architect's samples.
FABRICATION
Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door,
and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
1.
B.
fire-protection
Finishes: Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint finish for the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
in
Weld joints and grind smooth.
Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated
and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1.
2.
Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2
inch thick.
Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
10 44 00 - 3
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
2.5
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
B.
Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
2.6
STEEL FINISHES
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other contaminants
that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods.
B.
Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's
standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a
minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets
will be installed.
B.
Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1.
C.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
PREPARATION
Prepare recesses for fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim
style.
INSTALLATION
General: Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated.
1.
B.
Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.
Fire-Protection Cabinets:
48 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet, unless
Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
10 44 00 - 4
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.4
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
A.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection
specialties are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
B.
Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral
locking devices operate properly.
C.
On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factoryfinished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fireprotection cabinet manufacturer.
E.
Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
10 44 00 - 5
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
SECTION 113100 – PANTRY APPLIANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes all pantry appliances included on the Drawings and Equipment Schedule.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include operating characteristics, dimensions
of individual appliances, and finishes for each appliance.
B.
Verification Samples: Submit for mechanical and factory-applied finishes.
C.
Maintenance Data: For each product to include in maintenance manuals.
D.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following product certifications:
1.
2.
B.
AHAM Standards: Provide appliances that comply with the following AHAM standards:
1.
2.
C.
NFPA: Provide electrical components, devices and accessories for appliances that are
listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
UL and NEMA: Provide electrical components required as part of appliances that are
listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards.
Refrigerators and Freezers: AHAM HRF-1.
Dishwashers: AHAM DW-DW1.
Energy Ratings: Provide appliances that carry labels indicating energy-cost analysis (estimated
annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the FTC Appliance Labeling
Rule.
1.
Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling
program.
PANTRY APPLIANCES
11 31 00 - 1
30 April 2014
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.5
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
DELIVERY
A.
1.6
Deliver appliances only after utility rough-in is complete and construction in spaces to receive
appliances is substantially complete and ready for installation.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of each appliance
specified agrees to repair or replace appliances or components that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
2.
Microwave Oven: Five-year limited warranty for in-place service on defects in the
magnetron tube.
Refrigerator/Freezer: Five-year limited warranty for in-place service on the sealed
refrigeration system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis of Design: Provide products indicated on Drawings and Equipment Schedules.
B.
Manufacturers: Provide products complying with requirements of the contract documents and
manufactured by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
2.2
Amana Appliances.
Asko.
BOSCH, BSH Home Appliances Corporation
Curtis Company.
General Electric Company.
Hoshizaki.
Hotpoint.
Maytag.
Miele, Inc.
Meiko.
Piper Products.
RPI Industries.
Sharp.
U-Line.
Whirlpool Corporation.
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
PANTRY APPLIANCES
11 31 00 - 2
Gensler
12.7468.005
1.
2.
B.
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
Provide appliances with manufacturer's standard finish complying with manufacturer's
written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking,
color, gloss, and minimum dry film thickness for coated finishes.
Grind and polish stainless-steel surfaces for uniform, directionally textured finish.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
equipment installation.
C.
3.2
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Built-in Appliances: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with
concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough
openings are completely concealed.
C.
Freestanding Appliances: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in
each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.
D.
Utilities: Refer to Division 22 and Division 26 for plumbing and electrical requirements.
3.3
A.
Test each item of appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments.
B.
Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed.
C.
Remove packing material from appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready for
operation.
PANTRY APPLIANCES
11 31 00 - 3
Gensler
12.7468.005
3.4
30 April 2014
Novartis
East Hanover, NJ
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain appliances.
PANTRY APPLIANCES
11 31 00 - 4

PROJECT MANUAL Novartis 200 Forum

Transcription

Similar documents

AMCOL HEADQUARTERS Hoffman Estates, Illinois The new

Atlantis Energy Systems Inc.

Portland International Jetport

Creative office - Lowe Enterprises

Corningware Factory Store - ECLIPSE INTERLOCKING TILE SYSTEM

Coffing EC3 Manual

PERFAL04 Inside

new heritage hotel in old town albuquerque fact sheet

Tickets Available at the Library

South Terminal Redevelopment Program